USRE48992E1 - Spiroquinoxaline derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death - Google Patents

Spiroquinoxaline derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death Download PDF

Info

Publication number
USRE48992E1
USRE48992E1 US16/670,784 US201416670784A USRE48992E US RE48992 E1 USRE48992 E1 US RE48992E1 US 201416670784 A US201416670784 A US 201416670784A US RE48992 E USRE48992 E US RE48992E
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
alkyl
membered
independently selected
group
ring
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Active
Application number
US16/670,784
Other languages
English (en)
Inventor
Marcus Conrad
Joel SCHICK
Bettina PRONETH
Peter Sennhenn
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Helmholtz Zentrum Muenchen Deutsches Forschungszentrum fuer Gesundheit und Umwelt GmbH
Original Assignee
Helmholtz Zentrum Muenchen Deutsches Forschungszentrum fuer Gesundheit und Umwelt GmbH
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Helmholtz Zentrum Muenchen Deutsches Forschungszentrum fuer Gesundheit und Umwelt GmbH filed Critical Helmholtz Zentrum Muenchen Deutsches Forschungszentrum fuer Gesundheit und Umwelt GmbH
Priority to US16/670,784 priority Critical patent/USRE48992E1/en
Assigned to Helmholtz Zentrum München - Deutsches Forschungszentrum für Gesundheit und Umwelt (GmbH) reassignment Helmholtz Zentrum München - Deutsches Forschungszentrum für Gesundheit und Umwelt (GmbH) ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: SENNHENN, PETER, CONRAD, MARCUS, PRONETH, Bettina, SCHICK, JOEL
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of USRE48992E1 publication Critical patent/USRE48992E1/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D495/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D495/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D495/10—Spiro-condensed systems
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/498—Pyrazines or piperazines ortho- and peri-condensed with carbocyclic ring systems, e.g. quinoxaline, phenazine
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/499—Spiro-condensed pyrazines or piperazines
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/55—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having seven-membered rings, e.g. azelastine, pentylenetetrazole
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/55—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having seven-membered rings, e.g. azelastine, pentylenetetrazole
    • A61K31/551—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having seven-membered rings, e.g. azelastine, pentylenetetrazole having two nitrogen atoms, e.g. dilazep
    • A61K31/5513—1,4-Benzodiazepines, e.g. diazepam or clozapine
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/16—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for liver or gallbladder disorders, e.g. hepatoprotective agents, cholagogues, litholytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/18—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for pancreatic disorders, e.g. pancreatic enzymes
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P15/00—Drugs for genital or sexual disorders; Contraceptives
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/02—Drugs for dermatological disorders for treating wounds, ulcers, burns, scars, keloids, or the like
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02—Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A61P21/04—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system for myasthenia gravis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/02—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for peripheral neuropathies
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04—Antibacterial agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/10—Antimycotics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P39/00—General protective or antinoxious agents
    • A61P39/02—Antidotes
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D241/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings
    • C07D241/36—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D241/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings
    • C07D241/36—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D241/38—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atoms
    • C07D241/40—Benzopyrazines
    • C07D241/42—Benzopyrazines with only hydrogen atoms, hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals, directly attached to carbon atoms of the hetero ring
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D413/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D471/10—Spiro-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D487/10—Spiro-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D491/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00
    • C07D491/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D491/06—Peri-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D491/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00
    • C07D491/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D491/10—Spiro-condensed systems
    • C07D491/107—Spiro-condensed systems with only one oxygen atom as ring hetero atom in the oxygen-containing ring

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to compounds which are inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell death, and to pharmaceutical compositions containing such compounds. Furthermore, the present invention relates to the use of such compounds and pharmaceutical compositions in therapy, in particular in the treatment of a condition, disorder or disease that is characterised by non-apoptotic regulated cell-death or where non-apoptotic regulated cell-death is likely to play or plays a substantial role.
  • the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions described herein are also useful in the treatment of a condition, disorder or disease that is characterised by oxidative stress or where oxidative stress is likely to play or plays a substantial role; and/or a condition, disorder or disease that is characterised by activation of (1) one or more components of the necrosome; (2) death domain receptors; and/or (3) Toll-like receptors; and/or (4) players in ferroptotic/ferroptosis signalling, or where activation of any one of (1) to (3) and/or (4) is likely to play or plays a substantial role.
  • regulated necrosis and “necroptosis”; a specific regulated cellular necrosis mechanisms, discrete from apoptosis as described by Hitomi et al. (Cell 135:1311-23 (2008)) and Degterev and co-workers (Nat. Chem. Biol. 1:112-9 (2005)).
  • Other forms of regulated cell death are described in Galluzzi et al. (2012), including certain tentative new names for very specific signalling pathways that lead to cell death such as “parthanatos”, “paraptosis” and several others (see references in Galluzzi et al. 2012).
  • non-apoptotic regulated cell death includes “ferroptosis”, a non-apoptotic, iron-dependent, oxidative form of cell-death recently described by Dixon and co-workers (Cell 149:1060-72 (2012)). While necroptosis and ferroptosis share many features, differences between their phenotypes can be observed, and it is to be expected that additional regulated cell death modalities and lethal signalling pathways exist and may be described and defined separately to necroptosis etc.
  • Oxidative stress a state associated with a high level of reactive oxygen species (ROS)
  • ROS reactive oxygen species
  • caspase-independent apoptosis a pathway of regulated cell-death that operates in parallel to caspase-dependent apoptosis in response to multiple intracellular stress conditions
  • Oxidative stress the imbalance between the generation and clearance of ROS, is a potent inducer of cell death.
  • ROS ROS are also a major causative factor in the degeneration of neurons in stroke patients. Stroke is one prominent example of tissue damage caused by ROS following ischemia-reperfusion injury. Tissue damage due to ischemia-reperfusion injury is, however, not restricted to the central nervous system, it is also a hallmark of infarction (cardiac infarction being the most prevalent type of infarction) and an important complication in surgery with special emphasis on solid organ transplantation.
  • Oxidative stress and/or non-apoptotic regulated cell death is associated with many other conditions, disorders and diseases, or is a symptom the result of or arising from such a condition, disorder and disease.
  • cell, tissue, organ or organism intoxication such as circumstances which are the result of, arise from or are associated with drug treatment (e.g., kidney toxicity from cisplatin), drug overdose (e.g., liver toxicity from paracetamol), acute poisoning (e.g., from alcohol, paraquat or environmental toxins) or exposure to ionizing radiation.
  • drug treatment e.g., kidney toxicity from cisplatin
  • drug overdose e.g., liver toxicity from paracetamol
  • acute poisoning e.g., from alcohol, paraquat or environmental toxins
  • Oxidative stress and/or non-apoptotic regulated cell death may also be related to aesthetic conditions such as UV-damage/aging in skin and hair loss.
  • the terms ‘necroptosis’ and necroptosi and ‘ferroptosis’ are used herein and known in the art to indicate general and specific forms (respectively) of regulated—as opposed to accidental—necrosis (Galluzzi et al. 2012).
  • necrosis was considered merely as an accidental uncontrolled form of cell death, but evidence that the execution of some forms of necrotic cell death is also finely regulated by a set of signal transduction pathways and catabolic mechanisms is further accumulating (Galluzzi and Kroemer, Cell 135 26:1161-1163 (2008); Kroemer et al., Cell Death Differ.; 16(1): 3-11, (2009)).
  • death domain receptors e.g., TNFR1, Fas/CD95 and TRAIL-R
  • Toll-like receptors e.g., TLR3 and TLR4
  • TNFR1-, Fas/CD95-, TRAILR- and TLR3-mediated cell death seemingly depends on the kinase RIP1, as this has been demonstrated by its knockout/knockdown and chemical inhibition with necrostatin-1.
  • mitochondrial alterations e.g., uncoupling, production of reactive oxygen species, i.e., ROS, nitrosative stress by nitric oxide or similar compounds and mitochondrial membrane permeabilization, i.e., MMP, often controlled by cyclophilin D
  • lysosomal changes ROS production by Fenton reactions, lysosomal membrane permeabilization
  • nuclear changes hyperactivation of PARP-1 and concomitant hydrolysis of NAD+
  • lipid degradation following the activation of phospholipases, lipoxygenases and sphingomyelinases
  • RIP1 and RIP3 form the core complex within the necrosome.
  • the necrosome complex further comprises TRADD and FAS-associated protein with a death domain (FADD), caspase 8, the serine/threonine-protein phosphatase (PGAM5)(Micheau et al., Cell 14:1814-190 (2003) and Wang et al.
  • the necrosome regulates the decision between cell survival and regulated necrosis.
  • the phosphorylation of RIP1 and RIP3 engages the effector mechanism of regulated necrosis.
  • caspase 8 if caspase 8 is activated, it cleaves RIP1 and RIP3 thereby preventing the effector mechanism of regulated necrosis (Vandenabeele et al., Nature Reviews Mol. Cell Biol., 11:700-714 (2010)).
  • caspase 8 appears to be decisive whether a cell undergoes regulated necrosis or apoptosis by the initiation of the pro-apoptotic caspase activation cascade. Whether FADD or TRADD are strictly required for the assembly of the necrosome is presently not clear.
  • negative regulators of TNR-receptor-family- or Toll like receptor-mediated regulated necrosis include E3 ubiquitin ligases cIAP1 and cIAP2, cFLIP, and TAK1, whereas the deubiquitinating enzymes CYLD and A20 act as positive regulators of regulated necrosis (Vandenlakker et al, Cell Death Differ 18, 656-665, 2011).
  • the long and short isoforms of cFLIP were shown to act antagonistically, the short isoform promoting and the long isoform inhibiting TLR-ligand induced regulated necrosis (Feoktistova et al., Mol. Cell 43, 449-463, 2011).
  • FAB2 and FAB2 are additional components of the signalling complex formed upon TNF receptor-ligation whose precise function in the regulation of regulated necrosis is still unknown.
  • TRIF an adapter protein with a RIP1 homology interaction motif (RHIM) is coupling the signalling complex formed upon Toll like receptor ligation to TLR3 and TLR4.
  • RHIM homology interaction motif
  • a RIP1 and RIP3 containing multiprotein complex promoting apoptosis or regulated necrosis is formed independently from TNF receptor family members in response to DNA damage-mediated depletion of cIAP1 and cIAP2.
  • This complex further comprises FADD and caspase 8, the latter being the decisive determinant for the choice between apoptosis and regulated necrosis (Tenev et al., Mol. Cell 43, 432-448, 2011).
  • RIP1 is found in several types of complexes mediating an innate immune response to RNA and DNA viruses.
  • a complex comprising TANK, FADD, TRADD, NEMO, and RIP1 is recruited to the outer membrane of mitochondria in response to ligation of pattern recognition receptors RIG-I or MDA5 recognizing viral RNAs through interaction with IPS1 (also called MAVS).
  • IPS1 also called MAVS.
  • RIP1 shares RIP1 homotypic interaction motifs (RIM) for dimerization not only with RIP3, but also with the cytosolic DNA sensor DA and TRIF (the latter being involved in signal transduction through TLR3 and TLR4).
  • RIM homotypic interaction motifs
  • proteins or peptides containing a RHIM sequence may disrupt the RHIM interaction between RIP1 and RIP3 and may thus inhibit regulated necrosis (consensus sequence: I/V-Q-I/L/V-G-x-x-N-x-M/L/I)(Mack et al., PNAS 105, 3094-3099, 2008; Kaiser et al., J. Immunol. 181, 6427-6434, 2008).
  • these RIP1 containing protein complexes might nevertheless operate as molecular switches for oxidative signals that convert a pro-survival (or an interferon-inducing) signal into a regulated necrosis inducing signal.
  • regulated necrosis (and potentially other related forms of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death such as ferroptosis) may be characterized as a type of cell death that can be avoided by inhibiting—either directly or indirectly—the necrosome or other components of ferroptotic signalling, in particular the activity and/or interaction of components thereof such as RIP1, RIP3 and others such as one or more members of the ferroptotic pathway (either through genetic or pharmacological methods).
  • Certain spiroquinoxaline derivatives, and pharmaceutical compositions thereof, are generically disclosed in EP 0 509 398A1 and EP 0 657 166 A1, in particular for use in the treatment of virus infection.
  • spiroquinoxaline derivatives are generically disclosed in WO 2007/117180 A1 as formula 2.2, and a small number of specific spiroquinoxaline compounds are disclosed in the expansive Table 12 thereof.
  • WO 2007/117180 A1 relates primarily to the construction and composition of large combinatorial libraries of small molecules having interest as merely potential physiologically active substances and pharmaceutical compositions thereof. Of the huge number of specific compounds disclosed therein, only a small number of compounds (not being spiroquinoxalines) are tested for and suggested to have anti-cancer properties (example 40 and Table 14 thereof).
  • the present invention provides a compound selected from the group consisting of a spiroquinoxaline derivative having the general formula (I)
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, L, and G are as specified in claim 1 , for use in a method of treating (i) a condition, disorder or disease that is characterised by non-apoptotic regulated cell-death or where non-apoptotic regulated cell-death is likely to play or plays a substantial role; (ii) a condition, disorder or disease that is characterised by oxidative stress or where oxidative stress is likely to play or plays a substantial role; (iii) a condition, disorder or disease that is characterised by activation of (1) one or more components of the necrosome; (2) death domain receptors; and/or (3) Toll-like receptors; and/or (4) players in ferroptotic/ferroptosis signalling, or where activ
  • the present application provides a method of treating an individual with a need thereof (in particular a human patient), comprising administering a pharmaceutically effective amount of (in particular a therapeutically effective dose of) a compound selected from the group consisting of a spiroquinoxaline derivative having the general formula (I)
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, L, and G are as specified in claim 2 , with the proviso that when ring A is a monocyclic 4- to 10-membered N-heterocycloalkylene, then the individual is not suffering from a condition, disorder or disease that is cancer, and/or one the result of, arising from or associated with cancer.
  • the present application provides a compound selected from the group consisting of a spiroquinoxaline derivative having the general formula (I)
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, L, and G are as specified in claim 3 .
  • the present application provides a compound selected from the group consisting of a spiroquinoxaline derivative having the general formula (I)
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, L, and G are as specified in claim 4 for use as medicament.
  • the present invention provides a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound as specified in the first or second aspect and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
  • FIG. 1 Non-inhibition of apoptotic cell-death by compounds disclosed herein.
  • SH-SY5Y cells were propagated and seeded in 96-well plates, together with compound N-1, N-2, N-10 of Table 1-N ( FIG. 1(a) ), compound O/S-6 or O/S-3 of Table 1-O/S ( FIG. 1(b) ), or compound C-12, C-91, or C-205 of Table 1-C ( FIG. 1(c) )(each 1 ⁇ M) and TNF-alpha was added (final concentration: 10 mg/mL) to induce apoptosis.
  • apoptosis and pan-caspase inhibitor z-vad (final concentration: 50 ⁇ M) and the necroptosis inhibitor Necrostatin-1 (Nec-1; final concentration: 5 ⁇ M) were used for comparison.
  • Control wells were established with vehicle only (DMSO), with and without treatment with TNF-alpha to induce apoptosis. Cells were incubated, and cell survival was detected and quantified. Percentage cell survival after TNF-alpha-induced apoptosis is shown (error bars indicate standard deviation (SD)).
  • FIG. 2 Efficacy of a compound of the invention in an animal model of liver IRI.
  • a significant reduction of the serum markers for liver cell damage, GPT (a) and GOT (b), compared to vehicle control, upon treatment of mice with compound N-2 (“Cmpd”) of Table 1-N following IRI liver damage is shown.
  • the “Sham” bar represents the data from control animals that were treated to the same protocol but without atraumatic clipping. Errors shown are SEM.
  • Significant differences are seen between IRI+vehicle compared to IRI+Cmpd, as well as between IRI+vehicle compared to Sham+vehicle. No significant difference is seen between IRI+Cmpd and Sham+vehicle.
  • FIG. 2(c) shows a photograph representing a visual comparison between vehicle and compound-treated livers of mice from this study.
  • FIG. 3 Efficacy of a compound of the invention in an animal model of kidney IRI. Improved survival of mice suffering kidney-ischemic reperfusion injury (IRI), compared to vehicle control, after treatment with compound N-2 (“Cmpd”) of Table 1-N at a dose of both 1 and 10 mg/kg was observed.
  • IRI kidney-ischemic reperfusion injury
  • Cmpd compound N-2
  • FIG. 4 Efficiency of a compound of the invention in an animal model of traumatic brain injury. A trend of a (non-significant) positive effect of treatment with compound N-2 (“Cmpd”), reducing the contusion volume in the brains of mice following traumatic brain injury (TBI) compared to vehicle control.
  • Cmpd compound N-2
  • R 8 of the compound of the invention is halogen (such as Cl) and in another embodiment of the compound of the invention ring A is 4-piperidinylene, then in a preferred embodiment, R 8 of the compound of the invention is halogen (such as Cl) and ring A is 4-piperidinylene.
  • the terms used herein are defined as described in “A multilingual glossary of biotechnological terms: (IU-PAC Recommendations)”, H. G. W. Leuenberger, B. Nagel, and H. Kölbl, Eds., Helvetica Chimica Acta, CH-4010 Basel, Switzerland, (1995).
  • alkyl refers to a monoradical of a saturated straight or branched hydrocarbon.
  • the alkyl group comprises from 1 to 12 (such as 1 to 10) carbon atoms, i.e., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12 carbon atoms (such as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 carbon atoms), more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, such as 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • Exemplary alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, propyl, iso-propyl, butyl, iso-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, iso-pentyl, sec-pentyl, neo-pentyl, 1,2-dimethyl-propyl, iso-amyl, n-hexyl, iso-hexyl, sec-hexyl, n-heptyl, iso-heptyl, n-octyl, 2-ethyl-hexyl, n-nonyl, n-decyl, n-undecyl, n-dodecyl, and the like.
  • alkylene refers to a diradical of a saturated straight or branched hydrocarbon.
  • the alkylene comprises from 1 to 10 carbon atoms, i.e., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, such as 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • Exemplary alkylene groups include methylene, ethylene (i.e., 1,1-ethylene, 1,2-ethylene), propylene (i.e., 1,1-propylene, 1,2-propylene (—CH(CH 3 )CH 2 —), 2,2-propylene (—C(CH 3 ) 2 —), and 1,3-propylene), the butylene isomers (e.g., 1,1-butylene, 1,2-butylene, 2,2-butylene, 1,3-butylene, 2,3-butylene (cis or trans or a mixture thereof), 1,4-butylene, 1,1-iso-butylene, 1,2-iso-butylene, and 1,3-iso-butylene), the pentylene isomers (e.g., 1,1-pentylene, 1,2-pentylene, 1,3-pentylene, 1,4-pentylene, 1,5-pentylene, 1,1®iso-pentylene, 1,1-sec-pentyl, 1,
  • alkenyl refers to a monoradical of an unsaturated straight or branched hydrocarbon having at least one carbon-carbon double bond.
  • the maximal number of carbon-carbon double bonds in the alkenyl group can be equal to the integer which is calculated by dividing the number of carbon atoms in the alkenyl group by 2 and, if the number of carbon atoms in the alkenyl group is uneven, rounding the result of the division down to the next integer.
  • the maximum number of carbon-carbon double bonds is 4.
  • the alkenyl group has 1 to 4, i.e., 1, 2, 3, or 4, carbon-carbon double bonds.
  • the alkenyl group comprises from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, i.e., 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 8 carbon atoms, such as 2 to 6 carbon atoms or 2 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the alkenyl group comprises from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 carbon-carbon double bonds, more preferably it comprises 2 to 8 carbon atoms and 1, 2, 3, or 4 carbon-carbon double bonds, such as 2 to 6 carbon atoms and 1, 2, or 3 carbon-carbon double bonds or 2 to 4 carbon atoms and 1 or 2 carbon-carbon double bonds.
  • the carbon-carbon double bond(s) may be in cis (Z) or trans (E) configuration.
  • alkenyl groups include vinyl, 1-propenyl, 2-propenyl (i.e., allyl), 1-butenyl, 2-butenyl, 3-butenyl, 1-pentenyl, 2-pentenyl, 3-pentenyl, 4-pentenyl, 1-hexenyl, 2-hexenyl, 3-hexenyl, 4-hexenyl, 5-hexenyl, 1-heptenyl, 2-heptenyl, 3-heptenyl, 4-heptenyl, 5-heptenyl, 6-heptenyl, 1-octenyl, 2-octenyl, 3-octenyl, 4-octenyl, 5-octenyl, 6-octenyl, 7-octenyl, 1-nonenyl, 2-nonenyl, 3-nonenyl, 4-nonenyl, 5-nonenyl, 6-nonenyl, 7-nonenyl, 8-nonen
  • alkenylene refers to a diradical of an unsaturated straight or branched hydrocarbon having at least one carbon-carbon double bond.
  • the maximal number of carbon-carbon double bonds in the alkenylene group can be equal to the integer which is calculated by dividing the number of carbon atoms in the alkenylene group by 2 and, if the number of carbon atoms in the alkenylene group is uneven, rounding the result of the division down to the next integer.
  • the maximum number of carbon-carbon double bonds is 4.
  • the alkenylene group has 1 to 4, i.e., 1, 2, 3, or 4, carbon-carbon double bonds.
  • the alkenylene group comprises from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, i.e., 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 8 carbon atoms, such as 2 to 6 carbon atoms or 2 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the alkenylene group comprises from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 carbon-carbon double bonds, more preferably it comprises 2 to 8 carbon atoms and 1, 2, 3, or 4 carbon-carbon double bonds, such as 2 to 6 carbon atoms and 1, 2, or 3 carbon-carbon double bonds or 2 to 4 carbon atoms and 1 or 2 carbon-carbon double bonds.
  • the carbon-carbon double bond(s) may be in cis (Z) or trans (E) configuration.
  • alkenylene groups include ethen-1,2-diyl, vinyliden, 1-propen-1,2-diyl, 1-propen-1,3-diyl, 1-propen-2,3-diyl, allylidene, 1-buten-1,2-diyl, 1-buten-1,3-diyl, 1-buten-1,4-diyl, 1-buten-2,3-diyl, 1-buten-2,4-diyl, 1-buten-3,4-diyl, 2-buten-1,2-diyl, 2-buten-1,3-diyl, 2-buten-1,4-diyl, 2-buten-2,3-diyl, 2-buten-2,4-diyl, 2-buten-3,4-diyl, and the like. If an alkenylene group is attached to a nitrogen atom, the double bond cannot be alpha to the nitrogen atom.
  • alkynyl refers to a monoradical of an unsaturated straight or branched hydrocarbon having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond.
  • the maximal number of carbon-carbon triple bonds in the alkynyl group can be equal to the integer which is calculated by dividing the number of carbon atoms in the alkynyl group by 2 and, if the number of carbon atoms in the alkynyl group is uneven, rounding the result of the division down to the next integer.
  • the maximum number of carbon-carbon triple bonds is 4.
  • the alkynyl group has 1 to 4, i.e., 1, 2, 3, or 4, more preferably 1 or 2 carbon-carbon triple bonds.
  • the alkynyl group comprises from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, i.e., 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 8 carbon atoms, such as 2 to 6 carbon atoms or 2 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the alkynyl group comprises from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 (preferably 1, 2, or 3) carbon-carbon triple bonds, more preferably it comprises 2 to 8 carbon atoms and 1, 2, 3, or 4 (preferably 1 or 2) carbon-carbon triple bonds, such as 2 to 6 carbon atoms and 1, 2 or 3 carbon-carbon triple bonds or 2 to 4 carbon atoms and 1 or 2 carbon-carbon triple bonds.
  • alkynyl groups include ethynyl, 1-propynyl, 2-propynyl, 1-butynyl, 2-butynyl, 3-butynyl, 1-pentynyl, 2-pentynyl, 3-pentynyl, 4-pentynyl, 1-hexynyl, 2-hexynyl, 3-hexynyl, 4-hexynyl, 5-hexynyl, 1-heptynyl, 2-heptynyl, 3-heptynyl, 4-heptynyl, 5-heptynyl, 6-heptynyl, 1-octynyl, 2-octynyl, 3-octynyl, 4-octynyl, 5-octynyl, 6-octynyl, 7-octynyl, 1-nonynyl, 2-nonynyl, 3-non
  • alkynylene refers to a diradical of an unsaturated straight or branched hydrocarbon having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond.
  • the maximal number of carbon-carbon triple bonds in the alkynylene group can be equal to the integer which is calculated by dividing the number of carbon atoms in the alkynylene group by 2 and, if the number of carbon atoms in the alkynylene group is uneven, rounding the result of the division down to the next integer.
  • the maximum number of carbon-carbon triple bonds is 4.
  • the alkynylene group has 1 to 4, i.e., 1, 2, 3, or 4, more preferably 1 or 2 carbon-carbon triple bonds.
  • the alkynylene group comprises from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, i.e., 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 8 carbon atoms, such as 2 to 6 carbon atoms or 2 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the alkynylene group comprises from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 (preferably 1, 2, or 3) carbon-carbon triple bonds, more preferably it comprises 2 to 8 carbon atoms and 1, 2, 3, or 4 (preferably 1 or 2) carbon-carbon triple bonds, such as 2 to 6 carbon atoms and 1, 2 or 3 carbon-carbon triple bonds or 2 to 4 carbon atoms and 1 or 2 carbon-carbon triple bonds.
  • alkynylene groups include ethyl-1,2-diyl, 1-propyn-1,3-diyl, 1-propyn-3,3-diyl, 1-butyn-1,3-diyl, 1-butyn-1,4-diyl, 1-butyn-3,4-diyl, 2-butyn-1,4-diyl and the like. If an alkynylene group is attached to a nitrogen atom, the triple bond cannot be alpha to the nitrogen atom.
  • aryl refers to a monoradical of an aromatic cyclic hydrocarbon.
  • the aryl group contains 3 to 14 (e.g., 5 to 10, such as 5, 6, or 10) carbon atoms which can be arranged in one ring (e.g., phenyl) or two or more condensed rings (e.g., naphthyl).
  • Exemplary aryl groups include cyclopropenylium, cyclopentadienyl, phenyl, indenyl, naphthyl, azulenyl, fluorenyl, anthryl, and phenanthryl.
  • “aryl” refers to a monocyclic ring containing 6 carbon atoms or an aromatic bicyclic ring system containing 10 carbon atoms. Preferred examples are phenyl and naphthyl.
  • heteroaryl or “heteroaromatic ring” means an aryl group as defined above in which one or more carbon atoms in the aryl group are replaced by heteroatoms of O, S, or N.
  • heteroaryl refers to a five or six-membered aromatic monocyclic ring wherein 1, 2, or 3 carbon atoms are replaced by the same or different heteroatoms of O, N, or S.
  • it means an aromatic bicyclic or tricyclic ring system wherein 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 carbon atoms are replaced with the same or different heteroatoms of O, N, or S.
  • heteroaryl groups include furanyl, thienyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl (1,2,5- and 1,2,3-), pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl (1,2,3- and 1,2,4-), tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, thiadiazolyl (1,2,3- and 1,2,5-), pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl (1,2,3-, 1,2,4-, and 1,3,5-), benzofuranyl (1- and 2-), indolyl, isoindolyl, benzothienyl (1- and 2-), 1H-indazolyl,
  • Exemplary 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl groups include furanyl, thienyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl (1,2,5- and 1,2,3-), pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl (1,2,3- and 1,2,4-), thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, thiadiazolyl (1,2,3- and 1,2,5-), pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl (1,2,3-, 1,2,4-, and 1,3,5-), and pyridazinyl.
  • cycloalkyl or “cycloaliphatic” represents cyclic non-aromatic versions of “alkyl” and “alkenyl” with preferably 3 to 14 carbon atoms, such as 3 to 10 carbon atoms, i.e., 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 3 to 7 carbon atoms.
  • cycloalkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclopropenyl, cyclobutyl, cyclobutenyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptyl, cycloheptenyl, cyclooctyl, cyclooctenyl, cyclononyl, cyclononenyl, cyclodecyl, cyclodecenyl, and adamantyl.
  • cycloalkyl is also meant to include bicyclic and tricyclic versions thereof.
  • bicyclic rings are formed it is preferred that the respective rings are connected to each other at two adjacent carbon atoms, however, alternatively the two rings are connected via the same carbon atom, i.e., they form a spiro ring system or they form “bridged” ring systems.
  • cycloalkyl examples include C 3 -C 8 -cycloalkyl, in particular cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, spiro[3,3]heptyl, spiro[3,4]octyl, spiro[4,3]octyl, bicyclo[4.1.0]heptyl, bicyclo[3.2.0]heptyl, bicyclo [2.2.1]heptyl, bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl, bicyclo[5.1.0]octyl, and bicyclo [4.2.0] octyl.
  • cyclopropylene means a cyclopropyl group as defined above in which one hydrogen atom has been removed resulting in a diradical.
  • the cyclopropylene may link two atoms or moieties via the same carbon atom (1,1-cyclopropylene, i.e., a geminal diradical) or via two carbon atoms (1,2-cyclopropylene).
  • heterocyclyl or “heterocyclic ring” means a cycloalkyl group as defined above in which from 1, 2, 3, or 4 carbon atoms in the cycloalkyl group are replaced by heteroatoms of O, S, or N.
  • the maximum number of O atoms is 1, the maximum number of S atoms is 1, and the maximum total number of O and S atoms is 2.
  • heterocyclyl is also meant to encompass partially or completely hydrogenated forms (such as dihydro, tetrahydro or perhydro forms) of the above-mentioned heteroaryl groups.
  • heterocyclyl groups include morpholino, isochromanyl, chromanyl, pyrrolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, pyrazolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, indolinyl, isoindolinyl, di- and tetrahydrofuranyl, di- and tetrahydrothienyl, di- and tetrahydrooxazolyl, di- and tetrahydroisoxazolyl, di- and tetrahydrooxadiazolyl (1,2,5- and 1,2,3-), dihydropyrrolyl, dihydroimidazolyl, dihydropyrazolyl, di- and tetrahydrothiazolyl (1,2,3- and 1,2,4-), di- and tetrahydrothiazolyl, di- and tetrahydrothiazolyl, di- and tetrahydrothiadiazolyl (1,2,3
  • Exemplary 5- or 6-membered heterocyclyl groups include morpholino, pyrrolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, pyrazolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, di- and tetrahydrofuranyl, di- and tetrahydrothienyl, di- and tetrahydrooxazolyl, di- and tetrahydroisoxazolyl, di- and tetrahydrooxadiazolyl (1,2,5- and 1,2,3-), dihydropyrrolyl, dihydroirnidazolyl, dihydropyrazolyl, di- and tetrahydrothiazolyl (1,2,3- and 1,2,4-), di- and tetrahydrothiazolyl, di- and tetrahydroisothiazolyl, di- and tetrahydrothiadiazolyl (1,2,3- and 1,2,5-), di- and tetrahydropyr
  • N-heterocycloalkylene as used herein means a heterocyclyl group as defined above which contains at least one ring nitrogen atom and in which one hydrogen atom has been removed from the same carbon atom resulting in a geminal diradical.
  • the N-heterocycloalkylene may contain 1, 2, or 3 further ring heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of O, S, or N.
  • the maximum number of O atoms is 1
  • the maximum number of S atoms is 1
  • the maximum total number of O and S atoms is 2.
  • the N-heterocycloalkylene is monocyclic and contains 1, 2 or 3 ring nitrogen atoms and optionally does not contain O or S ring atoms.
  • the term “N-heterocycloalkylene” is also meant to encompass partially or completely hydrogenated forms (such as dihydro, tetrahydro or perhydro forms) of the above-mentioned heteroaryl groups (preferably partially or completely hydrogenated forms of the above-mentioned monocyclic heteroaryl groups) which contain at least one ring nitrogen atom and in which one hydrogen atom has been removed from the same carbon atom resulting in a geminal diradical.
  • an N-heterocycloalkylene may be saturated or unsaturated (i.e., it may contain one or more double bonds within the ring) but cannot be aromatic.
  • Exemplary N-heterocycloalkylene groups include azetidinylene (N at position 2 or 3 relative to the diradical carbon atom), pyrrolidinylene (N at position 2 or 3), pyrazolidinylene (Ns at positions 2 and 3 or 3 and 4), imidazolidinylene (Ns at positions 2 and 4 or 2 and 5), triazolidinylene (Ns at positions 2, 3, and 4 or 2, 3, and 5), piperidinylene (N at position 2, 3, or 4), piperazinylene (Ns at positions 2 and 5), di-, tetra-, and hexahydropyridazinylene (Ns at position 2 and 3 or 3 and 4), di-, tetra-, and hexahydropyrimidinylene (Ns at positions 2
  • N-heterocycloalkylene as used herein means that the 4 to 10 members of the N-heterocycloalkylene are connected in such a manner that they form a single ring (e.g. piperidinylene).
  • spiro carbon atom of ring A which belongs to both ring A and the quinoxaline moiety
  • the remaining 3 to 9 ring atoms of ring A only belong to ring A, i. e, the ring atoms of ring A do not belong to any further ring.
  • the term “mono-cyclic 4- to 10-membered N-heterocycloalkylene” does not encompass polycyclic (e.g., bi- or tricyclic) structures (such as indolinylene), wherein at least two ring atoms belong to more than one ring.
  • O/S-heterocycloalkylene as used herein means a heterocyclyl group as defined above which contains at least one ring heteroatom selected from oxygen and sulfur and in which one hydrogen atom has been removed from the same carbon atom resulting in a geminal diradical.
  • each of the ring atoms of the O/S-heterocycloalkylene is selected from the group consisting of carbon, oxygen, and sulfur (i.e., the O/S-heterocycloalkylene preferably does not contain heteroatoms other than oxygen or sulfur).
  • the maximum number of O atoms is 2 or 1
  • the maximum number of S atoms is 2 or 1
  • the maximum total number of O and S atoms is 2.
  • the O/S-heterocycloalkylene is monocyclic and contains 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur and optionally does not contain ring heteroatoms other than oxygen or sulfur.
  • O/S-heterocycloalkylene is also meant to encompass partially or completely hydrogenated forms (such as dihydro, tetrahydro or perhydro forms) of the above-mentioned heteroaryl groups (preferably partially or completely hydrogenated forms of the above-mentioned monocyclic heteroaryl groups) which contain at least one ring heteroatom selected from oxygen and sulfur and in which one hydrogen atom has been removed from the same carbon atom resulting in a geminal diradical.
  • an O/S-heterocycloalkylene may be saturated or unsaturated (i.e., it may contain one or more double bonds within the ring) but cannot be aromatic.
  • Exemplary O/S-heterocycloalkylene groups include oxetanylene (O at position 2 or 3), thietanylene (S at position 2 or 3), di- and tetrahydrofuranylene (O at position 2 or 3), di- and tetrahydrothienylene (S at position 2 or 3), di- and tetrahydropyranylene (O at position 2, 3, or 4), di- and tetrahydrothiopyranylene (S at position 2, 3, or 4), oxepanylene (O at position 2, 3, or 4), thiepanylene (S at position 2, 3, or 4), oxocanylene (O at position 2, 3, 4, or 5), thiocanylene (S at position 2, 3, 4, or 5), dioxolanylene (Os at positions 2 and 4 or 2 and 5), dithiolanylene (Ss at positions 2 and 3; 2 and 4; 2 and 5; or 3 and 4), oxathiolanylene (O at
  • the term “monocyclic 4- to 10-membered O/S-heterocycloalkylene” as used herein means that the 4 to 10 members of the O/S-heterocycloalkylene are connected in such a manner that they form a single ring (e.g. tetrahydropyranylene).
  • a single ring e.g. tetrahydropyranylene.
  • the term “monocyclic 4- to 10-membered O/S-heterocycloalkylene” does not encompass polycyclic (e.g., bi- or tricyclic) structures (such as 3,4-dihydro-2H-chromenylene), wherein at least two ring atoms belong to more than one ring.
  • cycloalkylene as used herein means a cycloalkyl group as defined above in which one hydrogen atom has been removed from the same carbon atom resulting in a geminal diradical.
  • the cycloalkylene is monocyclic.
  • cycloalkylene is also meant to encompass partially or completely hydrogenated forms (such as dihydro, tetrahydro or perhydro forms) of the above-mentioned aryl groups (preferably partially or completely hydrogenated forms of the above-mentioned monocyclic aryl groups) in which one hydrogen atom has been removed from the same carbon atom resulting in a geminal diradical.
  • a cycloalkylene may be saturated or unsaturated (i.e., it may contain one or more double bonds within the ring) but cannot be aromatic.
  • exemplary cycloalkylene groups include cyclohexylene, cycloheptylene, cyclopropylene, cyclobutylene, cyclopentylene, cyclooctylene, cyclohexenylene, cycloheptenylene, cyclopropenylene, cyclobutenylene, cyclopentenylene, and cyclooctenylene.
  • cycloalkylene as used herein means that the 3 to 10 ring carbon atoms of the cycloalkylene are connected in such a manner that they form a single ring (e.g. cyclohexylene).
  • spiro carbon atom of ring A which belongs to both ring A and the quinoxaline moiety
  • the remaining 2 to 9 ring carbon atoms of ring A only belong to ring A, i.e, the ring carbon atoms of ring A do not belong to any further ring.
  • the term “monocyclic 3- to 10-membered cycloalkylene” does not encompass polycyclic (e.g., bi- or tricyclic) structures (such as indenylene), wherein at least two ring atoms belong to more than one ring.
  • halogen or “halo” means fluoro, chloro, bromo, or iodo.
  • any two R 9 which are bound to the same carbon atom of ring A may join together to form ⁇ X means that two monoradicals (i.e., R 9 ) when substituting in total 2 hydrogen atoms bound to only one ring carbon atom of ring A can form the diradical ⁇ X.
  • R 9 two monoradicals
  • R 9 groups are monoradicals independently selected from the particular moieties specified herein (e.g., methyl, —Cl, —OH, or —C(O)CH 3 )) but also (2) the possibility that the two R 9 groups join together to form the diradical ⁇ X resulting in a ring A having the following formula:
  • X is O, S, or N(R 14 ). Similar terms such as “any two R 30 which are bound to the same carbon atom of a cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl group may join together to form ⁇ X 1 ” as used herein are to be interpreted in an analogous manner.
  • hydrogen atom(s) may be replaced with a group (i.e., a 1 st level substituent) different from hydrogen such as alkyl (preferably, C 1-6 alkyl), alkenyl (preferably, C 2-6 alkenyl), alkynyl (preferably, C 2-6 alkynyl), aryl (preferably, 3- to 14-membered aryl), heteroaryl (preferably, 3- to 14-membered heteroaryl), cycloalkyl (preferably, 3- to 14-membered cycloalkyl), heterocyclyl (preferably, 3- to 14-membered heterocyclyl), halogen, —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OR 71 , —N(R 72
  • R 71 , R 72 , and R 73 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from the group consisting of C 1-3 alkyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —S(C 1-3 alkyl), —NH 2 , —NH(C 1-3 alkyl), —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 , —NHS(O)
  • R 72 and R 73 may join together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached to form a 5- or 6-membered ring, which is optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from the group consisting of C 1-3 alkyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —S(C 1-3 alkyl), —NH 2 , —NH(C 1-3 alkyl), —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 , —NHS(O) 2 (C 1-3 alkyl), —S(O) 2 NH 2-z (C 1-3 alkyl) z , —C( ⁇ O)OH, —C( ⁇ O)O(C 1-3 alkyl), —C( ⁇ O)NH 2-z (C 1-3 alkyl) z , —NHC( ⁇ O)(C 1-3 alkyl), —NHC( ⁇ NH)NH
  • R 81 , R 82 , and R 83 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 3- to 6-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 6-membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from the group consisting of C 1-3 alkyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —S(C 1-3 alkyl), —NH 2 , —NH(C 1-3 alkyl), —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 , —NHS(O) 2
  • R 82 and R 83 may join together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached to form a 5- or 6-membered ring, which is optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from the group consisting of C 1-3 alkyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —S(C 1-3 alkyl), —NH 2 , —(C 1-3 alkyl), —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 , —NHS(O) 2 (C 1-3 alkyl), —S(O) 2 NH 2-z (C 1-3 alkyl) z , —C( ⁇ O)OH, —C( ⁇ O)O(C 1-3 alkyl), —C( ⁇ O)NH 2-z (C 1-3 alkyl) z , —NHC( ⁇ O)(C 1-3 alkyl), —NHC( ⁇ N)NH
  • X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from O, S, and NR 84 , wherein R 84 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl.
  • Typical 1 st level substituents are preferably selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 3- to 14-membered (such as 5- or 6-membered) aryl, 3- to 14-membered (such as 5- or 6-membered) heteroaryl, 3- to 14-membered (such as 3- to 7-membered) cycloalkyl, 3- to 14-membered (such as 3- to 7-membered) heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OR 71 , —N(R 72 )(R 73 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 71 , —S(O) 0-2 OR 71 , —OS(O) 0-2 R 71 , —OS(O) 0-2 OR 71 , —S(O) 0-2 N(R 72 )(R 73 ), —OS(
  • Typical 2 nd level substituents are preferably selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 5- or 6-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —S(C 1-3 alkyl), —NH 2 , —NH(C 1-3 alkyl), —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 , —NHS(O) 2 (C 1-3 alkyl), —S(O) 2 NH 2-z (C 1-3 alkyl) z , —C( ⁇ O)OH, —C( ⁇ O)O(C 1-3 alkyl), —C( ⁇ O)NH 2-z , (C 1-3 alkyl), —
  • Particularly preferred 2 nd level substituents include 4-morpholinyl, homomorpholinyl, 4-piperidinyl, homopiperidinyl (i.e., azepanyl, in particular 4-azepanyl), 4-piperazinyl, homopiperazinyl (i.e., diazepanyl, in particular 2,4-diazepanyl), N-methyl-piperazin-4-yl, N-methyl-homopiperazinyl, —CH 2 CH 2 OCH 3 , —OCH 2 CH 2 OCH 3 , —CH 2 CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z , —OCH 2 CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z , —CF 3 , and —OCF 3 .
  • Typical 3 rd level substituents are preferably selected from the group consisting of phenyl, furanyl, pyrrolyl, thienyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, partially and completely hydrogenated forms of the forgoing groups, morpholino, C 1-3 alkyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —OH, —OCH 3 , —SCH 3 , —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z , —C( ⁇ O)OH, and —C( ⁇ O)OCH 3 , wherein z is 0, 1, or 2.
  • aromatic as used in the context of hydrocarbons means that the whole molecule has to be aromatic.
  • a monocyclic aryl is hydrogenated (either partially or completely) the resulting hydrogenated cyclic structure is classified as cycloalkyl for the purposes of the present invention.
  • a bi- or polycyclic aryl such as naphthyl
  • the resulting hydrogenated bi- or polycyclic structure is classified as cycloalkyl for the purposes of the present invention (even if one ring, such as in 1,2-dihydronaphthyl, is still aromatic).
  • heteroaryl i.e., a dihydro variant of indolyl
  • heterocyclyl i.e., a dihydro variant of indolyl
  • partially hydrogenated forms of a 5-membered heteroaryl group include dihydro forms of said 5-membered heteroaryl group (such as 2,3-dihydrofuran or 2,5-dihydrofuran), whereas the tetrahydro form of said 5-membered heteroaryl group (e.g., tetrahydrofuran, i.e., THF) is a completely hydrogenated (or perhydro) form of said 5-membered heteroaryl group.
  • partially hydrogenated forms include di- and tetrahydro forms (such as di- and tetrahydropyridyl), whereas the hexahydro form (such as piperidinyl in case of the heteroaryl pyridyl) is the completely hydrogenated (or perhydro) derivative of said 6-membered heteroaryl group. Consequently, a hexahydro form of an aryl or heteroaryl can only be considered a partially hydrogenated form according to the present invention if the aryl or heteroaryl contains at least 4 unsaturated moieties consisting of double and triple bonds between ring atoms.
  • “Isomers” are compounds having the same molecular formula but differ in structure (“structural isomers”) or in the geometrical positioning of the functional groups and/or atoms (“stereoisomers”). “Enantiomers” are a pair of stereoisomers which are non-superimposable mirror-images of each other. A “racemic mixture” or “racemate” contains a pair of enantiomers in equal amounts and is denoted by the prefix ( ⁇ ). “Diastereomers” are stereoisomers which are non-superimposable mirror-images of each other. “Tautomers” are structural isomers of the same chemical substance that spontaneously interconvert with each other, even when pure.
  • Polymorphism as referred to herein means that a solid material (such as a compound) is able to exist in more than one form or crystalline structure, i.e., “polymorphic modifications” or “polymorphic forms”.
  • polymorphic modifications or “polymorphic forms”.
  • polymorphic forms are used interchangeable in the present invention. According to the present invention, these “polymorphic modifications” include crystalline forms, amorphous forms, solvates, and hydrates. Mainly, the reason for the existence of different polymorphic forms lies in the use of different conditions during the crystallization process, such as the following:
  • Polymorphic forms may have different chemical, physical, and/or pharmacological properties, including but not limited to, melting point, X-ray crystal and diffraction pattern, chemical reactivity, solubility, dissolution rate, vapor pressure, density, hygroscopicity, flowability, stability, compactability, and bioavailability. Polymorphic forms may spontaneously convert from a metastable form (unstable form) to the stable form at a particular temperature. According to Ostwald's rule, in general it is not the most stable but the least stable polymorph that crystallizes first. Thus, quality, efficacy, safety, processability and/or manufacture of a chemical compound, such as a compound of the present invention, can be affected by polymorphism.
  • the most stable polymorph of a compound (such as a compound of the present invention) is chosen due to the minimal potential for conversion to another polymorph.
  • a polymorphic form which is not the most stable polymorphic form may be chosen due to reasons other than stability, e.g. solubility, dissolution rate, and/or bioavailability.
  • crystal form of a material as used herein means that the smallest components (i.e., atoms, molecule or ions) of said material form crystal structures.
  • a “crystal structure” as referred to herein means a unique three-dimensional arrangement of atoms or molecules in a crystalline liquid or solid and is characterized by a pattern, a set of atoms arranged in a particular manner, and a lattice exhibiting long-range order and symmetry.
  • a lattice is an array of points repeating periodically in three dimensions and patterns are located upon the points of a lattice. The subunit of the lattice is the unit cell.
  • the lattice parameters are the lengths of the edges of a unit cell and the angles between them.
  • the symmetry properties of the crystal are embodied in its space group. In order to describe a crystal structure the following parameters are required: chemical formula, lattice parameters, space group, the coordinates of the atoms and occupation number of the point positions.
  • amorphous form of a material as used herein means that the smallest components (i.e., atoms, molecule or ions) of said material are not arranged in a lattice but are arranged randomly. Thus, unlike crystals in which a short-range order (constant distances to the next neighbor atoms) and a long-range order (periodical repetition of a basic lattice) exist, only a short-range order exists in an amorphous form.
  • complex of a compound refers to a compound of higher order which is generated by association of the compound with other one or more other molecules.
  • exemplary complexes of a compound include, but are not limited to, solvates, clusters, and chelates of said compound.
  • solvate refers to an addition complex of a dissolved material in a solvent (such as an organic solvent (e.g., an aliphatic alcohol (such as methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, isopropanol), acetone, acetonitrile, ether, and the like), water or a mixture of two or more of these liquids), wherein the addition complex exists in the form of a crystal or mixed crystal.
  • a solvent such as an organic solvent (e.g., an aliphatic alcohol (such as methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, isopropanol), acetone, acetonitrile, ether, and the like), water or a mixture of two or more of these liquids)
  • a solvent such as an organic solvent (e.g., an aliphatic alcohol (such as methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, isopropanol), acetone, acetonitrile, ether, and the like
  • isotopically labeled compounds one or more atoms are replaced by a corresponding atom having the same number of protons but differing in the number of neutrons.
  • a hydrogen atom may be replaced by a deuterium atom.
  • Exemplary isotopes which can be used in the compounds of the present invention include deuterium, 11 C, 13 C, 14 C, 15 N, 18 F, 32 S, 36 Cl, and 125 I.
  • half-life relates to the period of time which is needed to eliminate half of the activity, amount, or number of molecules.
  • the half-life of a compound of formula (I) is indicative for the stability of said compound.
  • vertebrates in the context of the present invention are mammals, birds (e.g., poultry), reptiles, amphibians, bony fishes, and cartilaginous fishes, in particular domesticated animals of any of the foregoing as well as animals (in particular vertebrates) in captivity such as animals particular vertebrates) of zoos.
  • Mammals in the context of the present invention include, but are not limited to, humans, non-human primates, domesticated mammals, such as dogs, cats, sheep, cattle, goats, pigs, horses etc., laboratory mammals such as mice, rats, rabbits, guinea pigs, etc.
  • animal as used herein also includes humans.
  • birds include domesticated poultry, and include birds such as chickens, turkeys, ducks, geese, guinea fowl, pigeons, pheasants etc; while particular non-limiting examples of bony or cartilaginous fish include those suitable for cultivation by aquiculture, and include bony fish such as salmon, trout, perch, carp, cat-fish, etc.
  • the present invention provides a compound selected from the group consisting of a spiroquinoxaline derivative having the general formula (I)
  • E is —N(R 6 )—
  • L is selected from the group consisting of C 1-10 alkylene, C 2-10 alkenylene, C 2-10 alkynylene, 1,1-(CH 2 ) a -cyclopropylene-(CH 2 ) b —, wherein each of a and b is independently selected from an integer between 0 and 3, and —(CH 2 ) m —[Y—(CH 2 ) n ] o —, wherein m is an integer between 1 and 6, n is an integer between 0 and 3, o is an integer between 1 and 3, wherein if n is 0 then o is 1; Y is independently selected from O, S, and —N(R 7 )—; and each of the C 1-10 alkylene, C 2-10 alkenylene, C 2-10 alkynylene, 1,1-cyclopropylene, —(CH 2 ) m —, and —(CH 2 ) n — groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum
  • G is phenyl, optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 independently selected R 8 ;
  • ring A is a monocyclic 4- to 10-membered N-heterocycloalkylene, a monocyclic 4- to 10-membered O/S-heterocycloalkylene, or a monocyclic 3- to 10-membered cycloalkylene, wherein each of the N-heterocycloalkylene, O/S-heterocycloalkylene, and cycloalkylene groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 9 ;
  • R 1 is H
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )(OR 11 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 R 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —OS(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ),
  • R 2 and R 3 may join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a ring which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the ring, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ;
  • R 6 is H
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, —OR 11 , and —NHR 20 , wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ;
  • R 8 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )(OR 11 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 R 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —OS(O) 1-2 N (R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)XR 11 , —
  • R 9 is, when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom, independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 R 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —OS(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R, —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C
  • X is independently selected from O, S, and N(R 14 );
  • R 11 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl, wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ;
  • R 12 and R 13 are, in each case, independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl, or R 12 and R 13 may join together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached to form the group —N ⁇ CR 15 R 16 , wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ;
  • R 14 is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, and —OR 11 , wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ;
  • R 15 and R 16 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, and —NH y R 20 2-y , or R 15 and R 16 may join together with the atom to which they are attached to form a ring which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the ring, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 , wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroary
  • y is an integer from 0 to 2;
  • R 20 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl, wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ; and R 30 is a 1 st level substituent and is, in each case, independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl,
  • R 71 , R 72 , and R 73 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of the C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from the group consisting of C 1-3 alkyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —OCF 3 , ⁇ O, —S
  • R 81 , R 82 , and R 83 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 3- to 6-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 6-membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of the C 1-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 3- to 6-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 6-membered heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from the group consisting of C 1-3 alkyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —OCF 3 , ⁇ O, —S(C
  • X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from O, S, and N(R 84 ), wherein R 84 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl.
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (II)
  • R 1 to R 5 , E, L and G are as defined above or below and ring A
  • ring A is a N-heterocycloalkylene which contains 1 ring nitrogen atom and is 4- to 8-membered (preferably 5-, 6- or 7-membered, more preferably 6- or 7-membered) or which contains 2 or 3 ring nitrogen atoms and is 5- to 8-membered, preferably 5-, 6- or 7-membered, more preferably 6- or 7-membered;
  • (ii) is a O/S-heterocycloalkylene which contains 1 ring oxygen or sulfur atom and is 4- to 8-membered (preferably 5-, 6- or 7-membered, more preferably 6- or 7-membered) or which contains 2 ring heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur and is 5- to 8-membered, preferably 5-, 6- or 7-membered, more preferably 6- or 7-membered; or
  • ring A is a N-heterocycloalkylene
  • ring A as such is unsaturated (i.e., the members of ring A constitute 1, 2, or 3 (preferably 1 or 2, most preferably 1) double bonds within the ring) but is not aromatic.
  • ring A is saturated (i.e., ring A as such is free of unsaturation within the ring); however, if ring A is substituted by one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) R 9 , R 9 may be unsaturated (i.e., may contain double and/or triple bonds and/or one or more (e.g., 1, 2. or 3) aromatic ring(s)).
  • 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2
  • R 9 may be unsaturated (i.e., may contain double and/or triple bonds and/or one or more (e.g., 1, 2. or 3) aromatic ring(s)).
  • the ring nitrogen, oxygen, and/or sulfur atoms of ring A are not at position alpha to the spiro carbon atom (i.e., in this embodiment, preferably the two atoms of ring A positioned alpha to the spiro carbon atom are carbon atoms).
  • ring A may be selected from the group consisting of piperidinylene, azepanylene (e.g., homopiperidinylene), azetidinylene, pyrrolidinylene, azocanylene, pyrazolidinylene, hexahydropyridazinylene, hexahydropyrimidinylene, diazepanylene (e.g., homopiperazinylene), diazocanylene, triazepanylene, triazocanylene, di- and tetrahydropyranylene, di- and tetrahydrothiopyranylene, oxepanylene, thiepanylene, oxetanylene, thietanylene, di- and tetrahydrofuranylene, di- and tetrahydrothienylene, oxocanylene, thiocanylene
  • ring A is selected from the group consisting of 3- and 4-piperidinylene (N at position 3 or 4 relative to the spiro carbon atom); 3- and 4-azepanylene, 3-azetidinylene, 3-pyrrolidinylene, 3-, 4-, and 5-azocanylene, 3,4-pyrazolidinylene, 3,4-hexahydropyridazinylene, 3,5-hexahydropyrimidinylene, 3,4-, 3,5-, 3,6-, and 4,5-diazepanylene, 3,4-, 3,5-, 3,6-, 3,7-, 4,5-, 4,6-diazocanylene, 3- and 4-tetrahydropyranylene (O at position 3 or 4 relative to the spiro carbon atom); 3- and 4-tetrahydrothiopyranylene; 3- and 4-oxepanylene; 3- and 4-thiepanylene; 3-oxetanylene;
  • ring A is selected from the group consisting of 4-piperidinylene, 3-piperidinylene, 3-azetidinylene, 3-pyrrolidinylene, 4-azepanylene, 3-azepanylene, 5-azocanylene, 4-azocanylene, 3-azocanylene, 3,6-diazepanylene (such as 4-piperidinylene, 3-piperidinylene, 4-azepanylene, and 3-azepanylene), 44-tetrahydropyranylene, 4-tetrahydrothiopyranylene, 3-tetrahydropyranylene, 3-tetrahydrothiopvranylene, 4-oxepanylene, 4-thiepanylene, 3-oxepanylene, 3-thiepanylene, 3-oxetanylene, 3-thietanylene, 3-tetrahydrofuranylene, 3-tetrahydrothienylene, 5-oxocany
  • ring A may be unsubstituted.
  • ring A is substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 9 , either (i) only one or more (preferably, 1, 2, or 3) ring heteroatoms of ring A (selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, wherein the maximum number of oxygen and sulfur atoms in ring A is preferably 2) are substituted with independently selected R 9 , or (ii) only one or more (preferably, 1, 2, or 3) ring carbon atoms of ring A are substituted with independently selected R 9 , or (iii) one or more (preferably, 1, 2, or 3) ring heteroatoms (selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, wherein the maximum number of oxygen and sulfur atoms in ring A is preferably 2) and one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A, e.g
  • ring A may be substituted (i) only at the ring heteroatom atom with B (preferably, the ring heteroatom is at position 3 if ring A is 4- or 5-membered; at position 3 or 4 (preferably 4) if ring A is 6- or 7-membered; or at position 3, 4, or 5 (preferably 4 or 5) if ring A is 8-membered); (ii) only at 1 or 2 ring carbon atoms of ring A each with 1 or 2 independently selected R 9 ; or (iii) at the ring heteroatom with R 9 (preferably, the ring heteroatom is at position 3 if ring A is 4- or 5-membered; at position 3 or 4 (preferably 4) if ring A is 6- or 7-membered; or at position 3, 4, or 5 (preferably 4 or 5) if ring A is 8-membered) and at 1 or 2 ring carbon atoms of ring A each with 1
  • each such R 9 may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C( ⁇ X)XR 11 , —C( ⁇ X)XR 11 , —C( ⁇ X)XR 11 , —C( ⁇ X)XR 11 , —C( ⁇ X)XR 11 ,
  • each such R 9 may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ O)R 11 , —C( ⁇ O)R 11 , —C( ⁇ O)R 11 , —C( ⁇ O)R 11 , —C( ⁇ O)R 11 , —C( ⁇ O)R 11 ,
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1 substituent selected from the group consisting of —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z , morpholinyl (e.g., 4-morpholinyl), piperazinyl (e.g., 1-piperazinyl), and N-methylpiperazinyl (e.g., 4-methylpiperazin-1-yl); C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halogen (preferably F), such as —CF 3 , —CH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 CHF 2 , or —CH 2 CH 2 F; —O(C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halogen (preferably F)), such as —OCF 3 , —OCH 2 CF 3 , —OCH
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; tert-butyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —O(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; —(CH 2 ) d -(4-morpholinyl); —(CH 2 ) d -(1-piperazinyl); —(CH 2 ) d -(4-methylpiperazin-1-yl); 4-morpholinyl; 4-piperazinyl; 4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl; halogen (in particular
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z , —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CH 2 , —CH 2 CH 2 F; —NH 2 ; —NH(C 1-3 alkyl); —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 ; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)NH 2-z (C 1-3 alkyl) z ; —S(O) 2 (C 1-3 alkyl); —S(O)
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —NH—(CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)NH 2-z (C 1-3 alkyl) z ; —S(O) 2 (C 1-3 alkyl); —S(O) 2 (CH 2 ) d NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —OH; and —
  • the ring carbon atoms of ring A are unsubstituted or each R 9 substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom is independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl (in particular methyl), —N(R 12 )(R 13 )(in particular NH 2 ), and —N(R 14 )C( ⁇ O)R 11 (in particular NHC(O)CH 3 ).
  • the ring carbon atoms of ring A are unsubstituted or one ring carbon atom of ring A is substituted with one R 9 being NH 2 or CH 3 , or with two R 9 being CH 3 .
  • each such R 9 may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-2 alkyl (such as C 1-8 alkyl or C 1-6 alkyl), C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 1-2 R, —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C( ⁇ X)X
  • each such R 9 may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-12 alkyl (such as C 1-8 alkyl, C 1-6 alkyl or C 1-4 alkyl), C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclyl, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C(
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring nitrogen atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-12 alkyl (such as C 1-8 alkyl, C 1-6 alkyl, or C 1-4 alkyl); C 1-2 alkyl (such as C 1-8 alkyl, C 1-6 alkyl, or C 1-4 alkyl) substituted with 1 substituent selected from the group consisting of —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), and —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halogen (preferably F), such as —CF 3 , —CH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 CHF 2 , or —CH 2 CH 2 F; cyclopropyl; 4-morpholinyl; homomorpholinyl; 4-piperidinyl; homopiperidinyl; 4-piperazinyl; homopiperazinyl; N-methyl-piperazin-4-yl
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring nitrogen atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; n-octyl; n-dodecyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CH 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 , —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)NH 2-z (C 1-3 alkyl) z ; —S(O) 2 (C 1-3 alkyl); —S(O) 2 (CH 2 ) d NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —OH; and —O(C 1-3 alkyl
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring nitrogen atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)NH 2-z (C 1-3 alkyl) z ; —S(O) 2 (C 1-3 alkyl); —S(O) 2 (CH 2 ) d NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —OH; and —O(C 1-3 alkyl), wherein z is 0, 1, or 2; d is 1, 2, or 3
  • the ring nitrogen atom of ring A is unsubstituted or each R 9 substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring nitrogen atom is independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-12 alkyl (in particular methyl, n-octyl, or n-dodecyl) and —C( ⁇ O)R 11 (in particular —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 or —C( ⁇ O)(CH 2 ) 6 CH 3 ).
  • the ring nitrogen atom of ring A is unsubstituted or is substituted with one R 9 being methyl.
  • each such R 9 may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, —OR 11 , and ⁇ O, wherein each of the C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, and 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C
  • each such R 9 may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclyl, —OR 11 , and ⁇ O, wherein each of the C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl, and 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 30 .
  • each R 9 when bound to a ring sulfur atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, C 1-3 alkyl, C 4 alkyl, —OR 11′ , and ⁇ O, wherein R 11′ is selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl (e.g., phenyl), 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of the methyl, ethyl, C 3 alkyl, C 4 alkyl, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl
  • each R 9 when bound to a ring sulfur atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; benzyl; —OH; ⁇ O; and —O(C 1-3 alkyl), wherein C 1-3 alkyl is methyl, ethyl, propyl or isopropyl.
  • the ring sulfur atom of ring A is unsubstituted or substituted with two ⁇ O groups.
  • the ring sulfur atom of ring A is unsubstituted or ring A contains one sulfur atom which is substituted with two ⁇ O groups (i.e., ring A contains the group —S( ⁇ O) 2 —).
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (III)
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I) and (II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkylene, C 2-6 alkenylene, C 2-6 alkynylene, —(CH 2 ) a -cyclopropylene-(CH 2 ) b —, wherein each of a and b is independently selected from an integer between 0 and 3, and —(CH 2 ) m —[Y—(CH 2 ) n ] o —, wherein m is 1, 2, or 3, n is 0, 1, or 2, o is 1, 2, or 3, wherein if n is 0 then o is 1; Y is independently selected from O, S, and —N(R 7′ )—, wherein R 7′ is selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 3- to 7-
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I) and (H)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkylene, C 2-4 alkenylene, C 2-4 alkynylene, —(CH 2 ) a -1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 ) b , wherein each of a and b is independently selected from 0, 1, and 2, and —(CH 2 ) m —[Y—(CH 2 ) n ] o —, wherein m is 1, 2, or 3, n is 0, 1, or 2, o is 1, 2, or 3, wherein if n is 0 then o is 1; Y is independently selected from O, S, and —N(R 7′ )—, wherein R 7′ is selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-3 alkyl, 3-, 5-, 6- or
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I) and (II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of C 1-3 alkylene, —(CH 2 ) a -1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 ) b —, wherein each of a and b is independently selected from 0 and 1, and —(CH 2 ) m —[Y—(CH 2 ) n ] o —, wherein m is 1 or 2, n is 0, 1, or 2, o is 1 or 2, wherein if n is 0 then o is 1; Y is O, wherein each of the C 1-3 alkylene, 1,1-cyclopropylene, —(CH 2 ) m —, and —(CH 2 ) n — groups is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 30 .
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I) and (II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of methylene; 1,1-ethylene; 1,2-ethylene (optionally substituted with one R 30 (such as phenyl) at position 2); trimethylene (—(CH 2 ) 3 —); 2,2-propylene (—C(CH 3 ) 2 —); 2,4-butandiol; -1,1-cyclopropylene-; —(CH 2 )—, 1-cyclopropylene; -1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 )—; —(CH 2 )-1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 )—; —CH 2 O—; —(CH 2 ) 2 —; and —(CH 2 ) 3 O— (such as methylene; 1,1-ethylene; 1,2-ethylene; trim
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I) and (II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of methylene; 1,1-ethylene; 1,2-ethylene; trimethylene (—(CH 2 ) 3 —); 2,2-propylene (—C(CH 3 ) 2 —); -1,-cyclopropylene-; —(CH 2 )-1,1-cyclopropylene; -1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 )—; —(CH 2 )-1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 )—; —CH 2 O—; —(CH 2 ) 2 O—; and —(CH 2 ) 3 O— (such as methylene; 1,1-ethylene; 1,2-ethylene; triethylene (—(CH 2 ) 3 —); 2,2-propylene (—C(CH 3 ) 2 —);
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I) and (II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of C 1 alkylene, C 2 alkylene (in particular 1,2-ethylene or 1,1-ethylene), C 1-3 alkylene (in particular trimethylene), and C 4 alkylene (in particular tetramethylene or 2,4-butanediyl), each of which being optionally substituted with one R 30 .
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I) and (II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of methylene, 1,1-ethylene, 1,2-ethylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene, 2,4-butanediyl, and 2-phenyl-1,2-ethylene (—CH 2 —CH(C 6 H 5 )—)
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I) and (II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of methylene and 2-phenyl-1,2-ethylene (—CH 2 —CH(C 6 H 5 )—).
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (IV)
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I), (II) and (III)) or below and G is phenyl which is either unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 (such as between 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 8 .
  • R 8 may be, in each case, selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C( ⁇ X)XR 11 , —XC( ⁇ X)R 11 , and —XC( ⁇ X
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I), (II) and (III)) or below and R 8 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I), (II) and (III)) or below and R 8 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1 substituent selected from the group consisting of —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), and —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halogen (preferably F), such as —CF 3 , —CH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 CH 2 , or —CH 2 CH 2 F; phenyl; cyclopropyl; 5-membered heterocyclyl (such as pyrrolidinyl); 4-morpholinyl; homomorpholinyl; 4-piperidinyl; homopiperidyl; 4-piperazinyl; homopiperazinyl
  • each R 8 is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; tert-butyl; phenyl; cyclopropyl; pyrrolidinyl (such as 4-pyrrolidinyl); —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —OCF 3 ; —O-phenyl; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CH 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —CN; —NH 2 ; —NH(C 1-3 alkyl), —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 3 ); —C( ⁇ O)OH; —C( ⁇ O)OH;
  • each R 8 is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; phenyl; cyclopropyl; pyrrolidinyl (such as 4-pyrrolidinyl); —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z , —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —OCF 3 ; —O-phenyl; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —CN; —NH 2 ; —NH(C 1-3 alkyl); —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)OH; —C( ⁇ O)O(C
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I), (II) and (III)) or below and G is either unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, or 3 R 8 , wherein R 8 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl (in particular methyl or tert-butyl); halogen (in particular F or Cl); —OR 11 (in particular —OCH 3 ); and C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 30 (in particular —CF 3 ).
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I), (II) and (III)) or below and G is either unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or 2 R 8 each independently selected from the group consisting of methyl, F, Cl, —OCH 3 , and —CF 3 .
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I), (II) and (III)) or below and G is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted phenyl, fluorophenyl (in particular 3-fluorophenyl), chlorophenyl (in particular 2-, 3- or 4-chlorophenyl), methylphenyl (in particular 2- or 3-methylphenyl), tert-butylphenyl (in particular 4-tert-butylphenyl), methoxyphenyl (in particular 3-methoxyphenyl), (trifluoromethyl)phenyl (in particular 3- or 4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl), difluorophenyl (in particular 2,4- or 2,6-difluorophenyl), dichlorophenyl (in particular 2,4- or 3,4-dichlorophenyl), chloroflu
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I), (II) and (III)) or below and G is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted phenyl, 2-chlorophenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 3-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 2,6-difluorophenyl, 3,4-dichlorophenyl, 4-chloro-2-fluorophenyl, and 3,5-dimethylphenyl.
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (V)
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I), (II), (III) and (IV)) or below and each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 is H.
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I), (II), (III) and (IV)) or below and at least one of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 is different from H.
  • R 2 is different from H and each of R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 is H; or R 3 is different from H and each of R 2 , R 4 , and R 5 is H; or R 4 is different from H and each of R 2 , R 3 , and R 5 is H; or R 5 is different from H and each of R 2 , R 3 , and R 4 is H; or both of R 2 and R are different from H and both of R 4 and R 5 are H; or both of R 2 and R 4 are different from H and both of R 3 and R 5 are H; or both of R and R are different from H (preferably in this embodiment R 2 and R 5 are the same) and both of R and R 4 are H; or both of R 3 and R 4 are different from H (preferably in this embodiment R 3 and R 4 are the same) and both of R 2 and R 5 are H; or each of R 2 , R 3 , and R 4 is different from H and R 5 is H; or each of R 2 , R 3 , and R 5 is H; or each
  • each of R 2 to R 5 if it does not join together with another of R 2 to R 5 to form a ring, is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 11 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11
  • each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 if it does not join together with another of R 2 to R 5 to form a ring, may be independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ O)R 11 , —C( ⁇ O)OR 11 ,
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I), (II), (III), and (IV)) or below and each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 , if it does not join together with another of R 2 to R 5 to form a ring, is independently selected from the group consisting of H; C 1-4 alkyl, C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1 substituent selected from the group consisting of —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), and —NH 2-z (CH 3 ); C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halogen (preferably F), such as —CF 3 , —CH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 CHF 2 , or —CH 2 CH 2 F; phenyl; cyclopropyl; 5-membered heterocyclyl; 4-morpholinyl; homomorpholinyl; 4-
  • each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 if it does not join together with another of R 2 to R 5 to form a ring, is independently selected from the group consisting of H; methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; phenyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —OCF 3 ; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —CN; —NH 2 ; —NH(C 1-3 alkyl); —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C(C(C( ⁇
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I), (II), (III), and (IV)) or below and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-4 alkyl, and halogen, wherein the C 1-4 alkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 30 (in particular wherein R 2 and R 5 are each —H).
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I), (II), (III), and (IV)) or below and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, Cl, and CF 3 (in particular wherein R 2 and R 5 are each —H).
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I), (II), (III), and (IV)) or below and R 2 and R 5 are each —H; R 3 is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, and Cl; and R 4 is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, and Cl.
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and C are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I), (II), (III), and (IV)) or below and (i) R 2 to R 5 are each —H; or (ii) R 2 and R 5 are each —H, and both of R 3 and R 4 are F, Cl, or methyl.
  • a ring is formed by (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5
  • said ring preferably is a 3- to 7-membered ring (e.g., a ring having 5 or 6 members) which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the ring, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 .
  • the ring may be an aromatic, cycloaliphatic heteroaromatic, or heterocyclic ring, wherein the heteroaromatic/heterocyclic ring contains 1 or 2 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of O, S, and N(R 40 ), wherein R 40 is selected from the group consisting of R 11 , —OR 11 , —NH y R 20 2-y , and —S(O) 1-2 R 11 , wherein R 11 , R 20 , and y are as defined above.
  • the ring formed by (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5 is a 5- or 6-membered aromatic, cycloaliphatic, heteroaromatic, or heterocyclic ring, wherein the heteroaromatic/heterocyclic ring contains 1 or 2 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of O, S, and N, wherein at least one heteroatom is N.
  • the ring formed by (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5 is selected from the group consisting of cyclopentadiene, furan, pyrrole, thiophene, imidazole, pyrazole, oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, dioxole (e.g., 1,3-dioxole), benzene, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, dioxine (e.g., 1,4-dioxine), 1,2,3-triazine, 1,2,4-triazine, and di- or tetrahydro forms of each of the foregoing.
  • cyclopentadiene furan, pyrrole, thiophene, imidazole, pyrazole, oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, diox
  • the ring formed by (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5 is selected from the group consisting of cyclopentadiene, furan, pyrrole, thiophene, imidazole, pyrazole, oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, benzene, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, 1,2,3-triazine, 1,2,4-triazine, and di- or tetrahydro forms of each of the foregoing.
  • the ring formed (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5 is cyclopentene (such as 2,3-dihydrocyclopentadiene), dioxole (such as 1,3-dioxole, optionally substituted at position 2 with one or two halogen atoms (such as F)), or dioxine (such as 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]-dioxine).
  • the total number of rings formed by (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5 is 0 or 1.
  • the remaining R 2 to R 5 which do not join together to form a ring may be selected from —H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C( ⁇ X)XR 11 , —XC( ⁇ X)R 11 , and —XC( ⁇ X)XR 11 , wherein each of the C 1-6 alkyl
  • R 2 and R 5 may be the same and/or R 3 and R 4 may be the same.
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I), (II), (III), and (IV)) or below and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-4 alkyl, and halogen, wherein the C 1-4 alkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 30 (in particular wherein R 2 and R 5 are each —H), or R 3 and R 4 may join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a 5- or 6-membered ring which is optionally substituted with one or two independently selected R 30 .
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I), (II), (III), and (IV)) or below and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, Cl, and CF 3 (in particular wherein R 2 and R 5 are each —H), or R 3 and R 4 may join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a dioxole or dioxine ring which is optionally substituted with one or two independently selected halogens (in particular F).
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I), (II), (III), and (IV)) or below and R 2 and R 5 are each —H; R 3 is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, and Cl; and R 4 is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, and Cl; or R 3 and R 4 may join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a dioxole (in particular 1,3-dioxole) or dioxine (in particular 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]-dioxine) ring, wherein the dioxole ring is optionally substituted with two F.
  • dioxole in particular 1,3-dioxole
  • dioxine in particular 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]-dioxine
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (I), (II), (III), and (IV)) or below and (i) R 2 to R 5 are each —H; (ii) R 2 and R 5 are each —H, and both of R 3 and R 4 are F, Cl, or methyl, or (iii) R 2 and R 5 are each —H, and R 3 and R 4 join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a 2,2-difluoro-1,3-dioxole ring or a 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]-dioxine ring.
  • R 30 in each case, may be a typical 1 st , 2 nd , or 3 rd level substituent as specified above and may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 5- or 6-membered cycloalkyl, 5-, 6-, or 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —S(C 1-3 alkyl), —NH 2 , —NH(C 1-3 alkyl), —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 , —NHS(O) 2 (C 1-3 alkyl), —S(O) 2 (C 1-3 alkyl), —S(O) 2
  • R 30 may be selected from the group consisting of phenyl, furanyl, pyrrolyl, thienyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrindinyl, pyridazinyl, partially and completely hydrogenated forms of the forgoing groups, morpholino, C 1-3 alkyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —OH, —OCH 3 , —OCF 3 , —SCH 3 , —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z , —C( ⁇ O)OH, and —C( ⁇ O)OCH 3 , wherein z is 0, 1, or 2.
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (N-I)
  • E is —N(R 6 )—
  • L is selected from the group consisting of C 1-10 alkylene, C 2-10 alkenylene, C 2-10 alkynylene, 1,1-(CH 2 ) a -cylopropylene-(CH 2 ) b —, wherein each of a and b is independently selected from an integer between 0 and 3, and —(CH 2 ) m —[Y—(CH 2 ) n ] o —, wherein m is an integer between 1 and 6, n is an integer between 0 and 3, o is an integer between 1 and 3, wherein if n is 0 then o is 1; Y is independently selected from O, S, and —N(R 7 )—; and each of the C 1-10 alkylene, C 2-10 alkenylene, C 2-10 alkynylene, 1,1-cyclopropylene, —(CH 2 ) m —, and —(CH 2 ) n — groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the
  • G is phenyl, optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 independently selected R 8 ;
  • ring A is a monocyclic 4- to 10-membered N-heterocycloalkylene, optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R;
  • R 1 is H
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )(OR 11 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —OS(O) 12 R 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —OS(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —
  • R 2 and R 3 may join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a ring which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the ring, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ;
  • R 6 is H
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, —OR 11 , and —NHR 20 , wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ;
  • R 8 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )(OR 11 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 R 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —OS(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C
  • R 9 is, when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom, independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 R 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —OS(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 ,
  • X is independently selected from O, S, and N(R 14 );
  • R 11 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl, wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ;
  • R 12 and R 13 are, in each case, independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl, or R 12 and R 13 may join together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached to form the group —N ⁇ CR 15 R 16 , wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ;
  • R 14 is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, and —OR 11 , wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ;
  • R 15 and R 16 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, and —NH y R 20 2-y , or R 15 and R 16 may join together with the atom to which they are attached to form a ring which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the ring, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 , wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroary
  • y is an integer from 0 to 2;
  • R 20 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl, wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ; and R 30 is a 1 st level substituent and is, in each case, independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl,
  • R 71 , R 72 , and R 73 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of the C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from the group consisting of C 1-3 alkyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —OCF 3 , ⁇ O, —S
  • R 81 , R 82 , and R 92 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 3- to 6-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 6-membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of the C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 3- to 6-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 6-membered heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from the group consisting of C 1-3 alkyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —OCF 3 , ⁇ O, —S(C
  • X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from O, S, and N(R 84 ), wherein R 84 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl.
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (N-II)
  • R 1 to R 5 , E, L and G are as defined above or below and the optionally substituted monocyclic 4- to 10-membered N-heterocycloalkylene ring A contains 1 ring nitrogen atom and is 4- to 8-membered (preferably 5-, 6- or 7-membered, more preferably 6- or 7-membered) or said ring A contains 2 or 3 ring nitrogen atoms and is 5- to 8-membered, preferably 5-, 6- or 7-membered, more preferably 6- or 7-membered.
  • ring A as such is unsaturated (i.e., the 4 to 10 members of ring A constitute 1, 2, or 3 (preferably 1 or 2, most preferably 1) double bonds within the ring) but is not aromatic.
  • ring A is saturated (i.e., ring A as such is free of unsaturation within the ring); however, if ring A is substituted by one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) R 9 , R 9 may be unsaturated (i.e., may contain double and/or triple bonds and/or one or more (e.g., 1, 2. or 3) aromatic ring(s)).
  • the ring nitrogen atoms of ring A are not at position alpha to the spiro carbon atom (i.e., in this embodiment, preferably the two atoms of ring A positioned alpha to the spiro carbon atom are carbon atoms).
  • ring A may be selected from the group consisting of piperidinylene, azepanylene (e.g., homopiperidinylene), azetidinylene, pyrrolidinylene, azocanylene, pyrazolidinylene, hexahydropyridazinylene, hexahydropyrimidinylene, diazepanylene (e.g., homopiperazinylene), diazocanylene, triazepanylene, triazocanylene and their regioisomers, each of which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R.
  • azepanylene e.g., homopiperidinylene
  • azetidinylene e.g., azetidiny
  • ring A is selected from the group consisting of 3- and 4-piperidinylene (N at position 3 or 4 relative to the spiro carbon atom); 3- and 4-azepanylene, 3-azetidinylene, 3-pyrrolidinylene, 3-, 4-, and 5-azocanylene, 3,4-pyrazolidinylene, 3,4-hexahydropyridazinylene, 3,5-hexahydropyrimidinylene, 3,4-, 3,5-, 3,6-, and 4,5-diazepanylene, 3,4-, 3,5-, 3,6-, 3,7-, 4,5-, and 4,6-diazocanylene, each of which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2)
  • ring A is selected from the group consisting of 4-piperidinylene, 3-piperidinylene, 3-azetidinylene, 3-pyrrolidiaylene, 4-azepanylene, 3-azepanylene, 5-azocanylene, 4-azocanylene, 3-azocanylene, and 3,6-diazepanylene (such as 4-piperidinylene, 3-piperidinylene, 4-azepanylene, and 3-azepanylene), each of which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 9 .
  • 4-piperidinylene, 3-piperidinylene, 3-azetidinylene, 3-pyrrolidiaylene 4-azepanylene, 3-azepanylene, 5-azocanylene, 4-azocanylene, 3-azocanylene, and 3,
  • ring A may be unsubstituted.
  • ring A is substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 9 , either (i) only one or more (preferably, 1, 2, or 3) ring nitrogen atoms of ring A are substituted with independently selected R 9 , or (ii) only one or more (preferably, 1, 2, or 3) ring carbon atoms of ring A are substituted with independently selected R 9 , or (iii) one or more (preferably, 1, 2, or 3) ring nitrogen atoms and one or more (preferably, 1, 2, or 3) ring carbon atoms of ring A (e.g., 1 or 2 ring nitrogen atoms and 1 or 2 ring carbon atoms) are substituted with independently selected R 9 .
  • R 9 independently selected R 9
  • ring A may be substituted (i) only at the ring nitrogen atom with R 9 (preferably, the ring nitrogen atom is at position 3 if ring A is 4- or 5-membered; at position 3 or 4 (preferably 4) if ring A is 6- or 7-membered; or at position 3, 4, or 5 (preferably 4 or 5) if ring A is 8-membered); (ii) only at 1 or 2 ring carbon atoms of ring A each with 1 or 2 independently selected R 9 ; or (iii) at the ring nitrogen atom with R 9 (preferably, the ring nitrogen atom is at position 3 if ring A is 4- or 5-membered; at position 3 or 4 (preferably 4) if ring A is 6- or 7-membered; or at position 3, 4, or 5 (preferably 4 or 5) if ring A is 8-membered) and at 1 or 2 ring carbon atoms of ring A each with 1 or 2 independently selected R 9
  • each such R may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C( ⁇ X)XR 11 ,
  • each such R 9 may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N)(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ O)R 11 , —C( ⁇ O)OR 11
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1 substituent selected from the group consisting of —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —NH 2-z (CH 3 )Z, morpholinyl (e.g., 4-morpholinyl), piperazinyl (e.g., 1-piperazinyl), and N-methylpiperazinyl (e.g., 4-methylpiperazin-1-yl); C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halogen (preferably F), such as —CF 3 , —CH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 CHF 2 , or —CH 2 CH 2 F; —O(C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halogen (preferably F)), such as —OCF 3 , —OCH 2 CF 3 , —OCH 2 CH
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; tert-butyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —O(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; —(CH 2 ) a -(4-morpholinyl); —(CH 2 ) d -(1-piperazinyl); —(CH 2 ) d -(4-methylpiperazin-1-yl); 4-morpholinyl; 4-piperazinyl; 4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl; halogen (in particular
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; —NH 2 ; —NH(C 1-3 alkyl); —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 ; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 2 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)NH 2-z (C 1-3 alkyl) z ; —S(O) 2 (C 1-3 alkyl); —S(O
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —N 2 —(CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 N 2 —(CH 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)NH 2-z (C 1-3 alkyl); —S(O) 2 (C 1-3 alkyl); —S(O) 2 (CH 2 ) d N 2-z (CH 3 ) z , —OH; and —O(C
  • the ring carbon atoms of ring A are unsubstituted or each R 9 substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom is independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl (in particular methyl), —N(R 12 )(R 13 )(in particular NH 2 ), and —N(R 14 )C( ⁇ O)R 11 (in particular NHC(O)CH 3 ).
  • the ring carbon atoms of ring A are unsubstituted or one ring carbon atom of ring A is substituted with one R 9 being NH 2 or CH 3 , or with two R 9 being CH 3 .
  • each such R 9 may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-2 alkyl (such as C 1-8 alkyl or C 1-6 alkyl), C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C(C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C(C(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C(C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —
  • each such R 9 may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-12 alkyl (such as C 1-8 alkyl, C 1-6 alkyl or C 1-4 alkyl), C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclyl, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R13), —N(R)S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring nitrogen atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-12 alkyl (such as C 1-8 alkyl, C 1-6 alkyl or C 1-4 alkyl); CH 1-2 alkyl (such as C 1-8 alkyl, C 1-6 alkyl or C 1-4 alkyl) substituted with 1 substituent selected from the group consisting of —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), and —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halogen (preferably F), such as —CF 3 , —CH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 CH 2 , or —CH 2 CH 2 F; cyclopropyl; 4-morpholinyl; homomorpholinyl; 4-piperidinyl; homopiperidinyl; 4-piperazinyl; homopiperazinyl; N-methyl-piperazin-4-yl; N-
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring nitrogen atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; n-octyl; n-dodecyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)NH 2-z (C 1-3 alkyl) z ; —S(O) 2 (C 1-3 alkyl); —S(O) 2 (CH 2 ) d NH 2 -2(C 3 ) z ; —OH; and —O(C 1-3 alkyl),
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring nitrogen atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)NH 2-z (C 1-3 alkyl) z ; —S(O) 2 (CH 1-3 alkyl); —S(O) 2 (CH 2 ) d NH 2 NH 2 (CH 3 ) z ; —OH; and —O(C 1-3 alkyl), wherein z is 0, 1, or 2; d is 1, 2,
  • the ring nitrogen atom of ring A is unsubstituted or each R 9 substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring nitrogen atom is independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-12 alkyl (in particular methyl, n-octyl, or n-dodecyl) and —C( ⁇ O)R 11 (in particular —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 or —C( ⁇ O)(CH 2 ) 6 CH 3 ).
  • the ring nitrogen atom of ring A is unsubstituted or is substituted with one R 9 being methyl.
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (N-III)
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I) and (N-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkylene, C 2-6 alkenylene, C 2-6 alkynylene, —(CH 2 ) a -cyclopropylene-(CH 2 ) b —, wherein each of a and b is independently selected from an integer between 0 and 3, and —(CH 2 ) m —[Y—(CH 2 ) n ] o —, wherein m is 1, 2, or 3, n is 0, 1, or 2, o is 1, 2, or 3, wherein if n is 0 then o is 1; Y is independently selected from O, S, and —N(R 7′ )—, wherein R 7′ is selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl,
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I) and (N-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkylene, C 2-4 alkenylene, C 2-4 alkynylene, —(CH 2 ) a -1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 ) b , wherein each of a and b is independently selected from 0, 1, and 2, and —(CH 2 ) m —[Y—(CH 2 ) n ] o —, wherein m is 1, 2, or 3, n is 0, 1, or 2, o is 1, 2, or 3, wherein if n is 0 then o is 1; Y is independently selected from O, S, and —N(R′)—, wherein R 1 is selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-3 alkyl, 3-,
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I) and (N-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of C 1-3 alkylene, —(CH 2 ) a -1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 ) b —, wherein each of a and b is independently selected from 0 and 1, and —(CH 2 ) m —[Y—(CH 2 ) n ] o —, wherein m is 1 or 2, n is 0, 1, or 2, o is 1 or 2, wherein if n is 0 then o is 1; Y is O, wherein each of the C 1-3 alkylene, 1,1-cyclopropylene, —(CH 2 ) m —, and —(CH 2 ) n — groups is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I) and (N-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of methylene; 1,1-ethylene; 1,2-ethylene (optionally substituted with one R 30 (such as phenyl) at position 2); trimethylene (—(CH 2 ) 3 —); 2,2-propylene (—C(CH 3 ) 2 —); 2,4-butanediyl; -1,1-cyclopropylene-; —(CH 2 )-1,1-cyclopropylene; -1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 )—; —(CH 2 )-1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 )—; —(CH 2 )-1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 )—; —CH 2 O—; —(CH 2 ) 2 O—; and —(CH 2 ) 3 O— (such as
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I) and (N-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of methylene; 1,1-ethylene; 1,2-ethylene; trimethylene (—(CH 2 ) 3 —); 2,2-propylene (—C(CH 3 ) 2 —); -1,1-cyclopropylene-; —(CH 2 )-1,1-cyclopropylene;-1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 )—; —(CH 2 )-1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 )—; —CH 2 O—; —(CH 2 ) 2 O—; and —(CH 2 ) 3 O— (such as methylene; 1,1-ethylene; 1,2-ethylene; trimethylene (—(CH 2 ) 3 —); 2,2-propylene (—C(CH 3
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I) and (N-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of C 1 alkylene, C 2 alkylene (in particular 1,2-ethylene or 1,1-ethylene), C 1-3 alkylene (in particular trimethylene), and C 4 alkylene (in particular tetramethylene or 2,4-butanediyl), each of which being optionally substituted with one R 30 .
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I) and (N-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of methylene, 1,1-ethylene, 1,2-ethylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene, 2,4-butanediyl, and 2-phenyl-1,2-ethylene (—CH 2 —CH(C 6 H 5 )—).
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I) and (N-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of methylene and 2-phenyl-1,2-ethylene (—CH 2 —CH(C 6 H 5 )—).
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (N-IV)
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I), (N-II) and (N-II)) or below and G is phenyl which is either unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 (such as between 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 8 .
  • R 8 may be, in each case, selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C( ⁇ X)XR 11 , —XC( ⁇ X)R 11 , and —X
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I), (N-II) and (N-III)) or below and R 8 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of C 4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I), (N-II) and (N-II)) or below and R 8 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1 substituent selected from the group consisting of —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), and —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halogen (preferably F), such as —CF 3 , —CH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 CHF 2 , or —CH 2 CH 2 F; phenyl; cyclopropyl; 5-membered heterocyclyl (such as pyrrolidinyl); 4-morpholinyl; homomorpholinyl; 4-piperidinyl; homopiperidinyl; 4-piper
  • each R 8 is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; tert-butyl; phenyl; cyclopropyl; pyrrolidinyl (such as 4-pyrrolidinyl); —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —OCF 3 ; —O-phenyl; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —CN; —NH 2 ; NH(C 1-3 alkyl); —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)OH; —C( ⁇ O)OH
  • each R 8 is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; phenyl; cyclopropyl; pyrrolidinyl (such as 4-pyrrolidinyl); —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —OCF 3 ; —O-phenyl; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —CN; —N 2 ; —NH(C 1-3 alkyl); —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)OH; —C( ⁇ O)O(
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I), (N-II) and (N-III)) or below and G is either unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, or 3 R 8 , wherein R 8 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl (in particular methyl or tert-butyl); halogen (in particular F or Cl); —OR 11 (in particular —OCH 3 ); and C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 30 (in particular —CF 3 ).
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I), (N-I) and (N-II)) or below and G is either unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or 2 R 8 each independently selected from the group consisting of methyl, F, Cl, —OCH 3 , and —CF 3 .
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I), (N-II) and (N-III)) or below and G is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted phenyl, fluorophenyl (in particular 3-fluorophenyl), chlorophenyl (in particular 2-, 3- or 4-chlorophenyl), methylphenyl (in particular 2- or 3-methylphenyl), tert-butylphenyl (in particular 4-tert-butylphenyl), methoxyphenyl (in particular 3-methoxyphenyl), (trifluoromethyl)phenyl (in particular 3- or 4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl), difluorophenyl (in particular 2,4- or 2,6-difluorophenyl), dichlorophenyl (in particular 2,4- or 3,4-dichlor
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I), (N-II) and (N-III)) or below and G is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted phenyl, 2-chlorophenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 3-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 2,6-difluorophenyl, 3,4-dichlorophenyl, 4-chloro-2-fluorophenyl, and 3,5-dimethylphenyl.
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (N-V)
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I), (N-II), (N-III) and (N-IV)) or below and each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 is H.
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I), (N-II), (N-III) and (N-IV)) or below and at least one of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 is different from H.
  • R 2 is different from H and each of R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 is H; or R 3 is different from H and each of R 2 , R 4 , and R 5 is H; or R 4 is different from H and each of R 2 , R 3 , and R 5 is H; or R 5 is different from H and each of R 2 , R 3 , and R 4 is H; or both of R 2 and R 3 are different from H and both of R 4 and R 5 are H; or both of R 2 and R 4 are different from H and both of R 3 and R 5 are H; or both of R 2 and R 5 are different from H (preferably in this embodiment R 2 and R 5 are the same) and both of R 3 and R 4 are H; or both of R 3 and R 4 are different from H (preferably in this embodiment R 3 and R 4 are the same) and both of R 2 and R 5 are H; or each of R 2 , R 3 , and R 4 is different from H and R 5 is H; or each of R 2 , R 3 , and R 4 is
  • each of R 2 to R 5 if it does not join together with another of R 2 to R 5 to form a ring, is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ),
  • each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 if it does not join together with another of R 2 to R 5 to form a ring, may be independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ O)R 11 , —C( ⁇ O)OR 11 ,
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I), (N-II), (N-III), and (N-IV)) or below and each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 1 , if it does not join together with another of R 2 to R 5 to form a ring, is independently selected from the group consisting of H; C 1-4 alkyl; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1 substituent selected from the group consisting of —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), and —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halogen (preferably F), such as —CF 3 , —CH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 CHF 2 , or —CH 2 CH 2 F; phenyl; cyclopropyl; 5-membered heterocyclyl
  • each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 if it does not join together with another of R 2 to R 5 to form a ring, is independently selected from the group consisting of H; methyl ethyl; isopropyl; phenyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —OCF 3 ; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —CN; —NH 2 ; —NH(C 1-3 alkyl); —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I), (N-II), (N-III), and (N-IV)) or below and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-4 alkyl, and halogen, wherein the C 1-4 alkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 30 (in particular wherein R 2 and R 5 are each —H).
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I), (N-II), (N-III), and (N-IV)) or below and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, Cl, and CF 3 (in particular wherein R 2 and R 5 are each —H).
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I), (N-II), (N-III), and (N-IV)) or below and R 2 and R 5 are each —H; R 3 is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, and Cl; and R 4 is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, and Cl.
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I), (N-II), (N-III), and (N-IV)) or below and (i) R 2 to R 5 are each —H; or (ii) R 2 and R 5 are each —H, and both of R 3 and R 4 are F, Cl, or methyl.
  • a ring is formed by (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5
  • said ring preferably is a 3- to 7-membered ring (e.g., a ring having 5 or 6 members) which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the ring, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 .
  • the ring may be an aromatic, cycloaliphatic, heteroaromatic, or heterocyclic ring, wherein the heteroaromatic/heterocyclic ring contains 1 or 2 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of O, S, and N(R 40 ), wherein R 40 is selected from the group consisting of R 11 , —OR 11 , —NH y R 20 2-y , and —S(O) 1-2 R 11 , wherein R 11 , R 20 , and y are as defined above.
  • the ring formed by (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5 is a 5- or 6-membered aromatic, cycloaliphatic, heteroaromatic, or heterocyclic ring, wherein the heteroaromatic/heterocyclic ring contains 1 or 2 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of O, S, and N, wherein at least one heteroatom is N.
  • the ring formed by (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5 is selected from the group consisting of cyclopentadiene, furan, pyrrole, thiophene, imidazole, pyrazole, oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, dioxole (e.g., 1,3-dioxole), benzene, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, dioxine (e.g., 1,4-dioxine), 1,2,3-triazine, 1,2,4-triazine, and di- or tetrahydro forms of each of the foregoing.
  • cyclopentadiene furan, pyrrole, thiophene, imidazole, pyrazole, oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, diox
  • the ring formed (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5 is cyclopentene (such as 2,3-dihydrocyclopentadiene), dioxole (such as 1,3dioxole, optionally substituted at position 2 with one or two halogen atoms (such as F)), or dioxine (such as 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]-dioxine).
  • the total number of rings formed by (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5 is 0 or 1.
  • the remaining R 2 to R 5 which do not join together to form a ring may be selected from —H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 12 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C( ⁇ X)XR 11 , —XC( ⁇ X)R 11 , and —XC( ⁇ X)XR 11 , wherein each of the C 1-6 alkyl,
  • R 2 and R 5 may be the same and/or R 3 and R 4 may be the same.
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I), (N-II), (N-III), and (N-IV)) or below and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-4 alkyl, and halogen, wherein the C 1-4 alkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 30 (in particular wherein R 2 and R 5 are each —H), or R 3 and R 4 may join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a 5- or 6-membered ring which is optionally substituted with one or two independently selected R 30 .
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I), (N-II), (N-III), and (N-IV)) or below and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, Cl, and CF 3 (in particular wherein R 2 and R 5 are each —H), or R 3 and R 4 may join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a dioxole or dioxine ring which is optionally substituted with one or two independently selected halogens (in particular F).
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defied above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I), (N-II), (N-III), and (N-IV)) or below and R 2 and R 5 are each —H; R 3 is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, and Cl; and R 4 is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, and Cl; or R and R 4 may join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a dioxole (in particular 1,3-dioxole) or dioxine (in particular 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]-dioxine) ring, wherein the dioxole ring is optionally substituted with two F.
  • dioxole in particular 1,3-dioxole
  • dioxine in particular 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]-dioxine
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (N-I), (N-II), (N-III), and (N-IV)) or below and (i) R 2 to R 5 are each —H; (ii) R 2 and R 5 are each —H, and both of R 3 and R 4 are F, Cl, or methyl, or (iii) R 2 and R 5 are each —H, and R 3 and R 4 join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a 2,2-difluoro-1,3-dioxole ring or a 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]-dioxine ring.
  • R 30 in each case, may be a typical 1 st , 2 nd , or 3 rd level substituent as specified above and may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 5- or 6-membered cycloalkyl, 5-, 6-, or 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —S(C 1-3 alkyl), —NH 2 , —N(C 1-3 alkyl), —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 , —NHS(O) 2 (C 1-3 al
  • R 30 may be selected from the group consisting of phenyl, furanyl, pyrrolyl, thienyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, partially and completely hydrogenated forms of the forgoing groups, morpholino, C 1-3 alkyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —OH, —OCH 3 , —OCF 3 , —SCH 3 , —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z , —C( ⁇ O)OH, and —C( ⁇ O)OCH 3 , wherein z is 0, 1, or 2.
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (O/S-I)
  • E is —N(R 6 )—
  • L is selected from the group consisting of C 1-10 alkylene, C 2-10 alkenylene, C 2-10 alkynylene, 1,1-(CH 2 ) a -cyclopropylene-(CH 2 ) b —, wherein each of a and b is independently selected from an integer between 0 and 3, and —(CH 2 ) m —[Y—(CH 2 ) n ] o —, wherein m is an integer between 1 and 6, n is an integer between 0 and 3, o is an integer between 1 and 3, wherein if n is 0 then o is 1; Y is independently selected from O, S, and —N(R 7 )—; and each of the C 1-10 alkylene, C 2-10 alkenylene, C 2-10 alkynylene, 1,1-cyclopropylene, —(CH 2 ) m —, and —(CH 2 ) n — groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum
  • G is phenyl, optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 independently selected R 8 ;
  • ring A is a monocyclic 4- to 10-membered O/S-heterocycloalkylene, optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 9 ;
  • R 1 is H
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )(OR 11 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 R 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —OS(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ),
  • R 2 and R 3 may join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a ring which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the ring, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ;
  • R 6 is H
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, —OR 11 , and —NHR 20 , wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ;
  • R 8 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )(OR 11 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 R 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —OS(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C
  • R 9 is, when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom, independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 R 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —OS(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 ,
  • X is independently selected from O, S, and N(R 14 );
  • R 11 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl, wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ;
  • R 12 and R 13 are, in each case, independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl, or R 12 and R 13 may join together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached to form the group —N ⁇ CR 15 R 16 , wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ;
  • R 14 is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, and —OR 11 , wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ;
  • R 15 and R 16 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, and —NH y R 20 2-y , or R 15 and R 16 may join together with the atom to which they are attached to form a ring which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the ring, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 , wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroary
  • y is an integer from 0 to 2;
  • R 20 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl, wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ; and R 30 is a 1 st level substituent and is, in each case, independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl,
  • R 71 , R 72 , and R 73 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of the C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from the group consisting of C 1-3 alkyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —OCF 3 , ⁇ O, —S
  • R 81 , R 82 , and R 83 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 3- to 6-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 6-membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of the C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 3- to 6-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 6-membered heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from the group consisting of C 1-3 alkyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —OCF 3 , ⁇ O, —S(C
  • X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from O, S, and N(R 84 ), wherein R 84 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl.
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (O/S-II)
  • R 1 to R 5 , E, L and G are as defined above or below and the optionally substituted monocyclic 4- to 10-membered O/S-heterocycloalkylene ring A contains 1 ring oxygen or sulfur atom and is 4- to 8-membered (preferably 5-, 6- or 7-membered, more preferably 6- or 7-membered) or said ring A contains 2 ring heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur and is 5- to 8-membered, preferably 5-, 6- or 7-membered, more preferably 6- or 7-membered.
  • ring A as such is unsaturated (i.e., the 4 to 10 members of ring A constitute 1, 2, or 3 (preferably 1 or 2, most preferably 1) double bonds within the ring) but is not aromatic.
  • ring A is saturated (i.e., ring A as such is free of unsaturation within the ring); however, if ring A is substituted by one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) R 9 , R 9 may be unsaturated (i.e., may contain double and/or triple bonds and/or one or more (e.g., 1, 2. or 3) aromatic ring(s)).
  • the ring oxygen or sulfur atoms of ring A are not at position alpha to the spiro carbon atom (i.e., in this embodiment, preferably the two atoms of ring A positioned alpha to the spiro carbon atom are carbon atoms).
  • ring A may be selected from the group consisting of di- and tetrahydropyranylene, di- and tetrahydrothiopyranylene, oxepanylene, thiepanylene, oxetanylene, thietanylene, di- and tetrahydrofuranylene, di- and tetrahydrothienylene, oxocanylene, thiocanylene, dithiolanylene, oxathiolanylene, dioxanylene, dithianylene, oxathianylene, dioxepanylene, dithiepanylene, oxathiepanylene, dioxocanylene, dithiocanylene, oxathiocanylene, and their regioisomers, each of which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of
  • ring A is selected from the group consisting of 3- and 4-tetrahydropyranylene (O at position 3 or 4 relative to the spiro carbon atom); 3- and 4-tetrahydrothiopyranylene; 3- and 4-oxepanylene; 3- and 4-thiepanylene; 3-oxetanylene; 3-thietanylene; 3-tetrahydrofuranylene; 3-tetrahydrothienylene; 3-, 4-, and 5-oxocanylene; 3-, 4-, and 5-thiocanylene; 3,4-dithiolanylene; 3,4-oxathiolanylene; 3,5-dioxanylene; 3,4- and 3,5-dithianylene; 3,4-, 3,5-, and 4,3-oxathianylene; 3,5- and 3,6-dioxepanylene; 3,4-, 3,5-, 3,6-, and 4,5-dithiepan
  • ring A is selected from the group consisting of 4-tetrahydropyranylene, 4-tetrahydrothiopyranylene, 3-tetrahydropyranylene, 3-tetrahydrothiopyranylene, 4-oxepanylene, 4-thiepanylene, 3-oxepanylene, 3-thiepanylene, 3-oxetanylene, 3-thietanylene, 3-tetrahydrofuranylene, 3-tetrahydrothienylene, 5-oxocanylene, 5-thiocanylene, 4-oxocanylene, and 4-thiocanylene (such as -tetrahydropyranylene, 4-tetrahydrothiopyranylene, 3-tetrahydropyranylene, 3-tetrahydrothiopyranylene, 4-oxepanylene, 4-thiepanylene, 3-oxepanylene, and 3-thiepanylene), each of
  • ring A may be unsubstituted.
  • ring A is substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 9 , either (i) only one or more (preferably, 1 or 2) ring sulfur atoms of ring A are substituted with independently selected R 4 , or (ii) only one or more (preferably, 1, 2, or 3) ring carbon atoms of ring A are substituted with independently selected R 9 , or (iii) one or more (preferably, 1 or 2) ring sulfur atoms and one or more (preferably, 1, 2, or 3) ring carbon atoms of ring A (e.g., 1 or 2 ring sulfur atoms and 1 or 2 ring carbon atoms) are substituted with independently selected R 9 .
  • R 9 independently selected
  • ring A may be substituted (i) only at the ring sulfur atom with R 9 (preferably, the ring sulfur atom is at position 3 if ring A is 4- or 5-membered; at position 3 or 4 (preferably 4) if ring A is 6- or 7-membered; or at position 3, 4, or 5 (preferably 4 or 5) if ring A is 8-membered); (ii) only at 1 or 2 ring carbon atoms of ring A each with 1 or 2 independently selected R 9 ; or (iii) at the ring sulfur atom with R (preferably, the ring sulfur atom is at position 3 if ring A is 4- or 5-membered; at position 3 or 4 (preferably 4) if ring A is 6- or 7-membered; or at position 3, 4, or 5 (preferably 4 or 5) if ring A is 8-membered) and at 1 or 2 ring carbon atoms of ring A each with 1 or 2 independently selected R 9 ;
  • each such R 9 may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 (R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C( ⁇ X)XR 11 , —C( ⁇ X)XR 11
  • each such R 9 may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ O)R 11 , —C(C( ⁇ O)R 11 , —C(
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1 substituent selected from the group consisting of —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z , morpholinyl (e.g., 4-morpholinyl), piperazinyl (e.g., 1-piperazinyl), and N-methylpiperazinyl (e.g., 4-methylpiperazin-1-yl); C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halogen (preferably F), such as —CF 3 , —CH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 CHF 2 , or —CH 2 CH 2 F; —O(C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halogen (preferably F)), such as —OCF 3 , —OCH 2 CF 3 , —OCH
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; tert-butyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —O(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; —(CH 2 ) d -(4-morpholinyl); —(CH 2 ) d -(1-piperazinyl); —(CH 2 ) a -(4-methylpiperazin-1-yl); 4-morpholinyl; 4-piperazinyl; 4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl; halogen (in particular
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CH 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; —N 2 ; —N(C 1-3 alkyl); —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 ; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2-z (C 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)NH 2-z (C 1-3 alkyl) z ; —S(O) 2 (C 1-3 alkyl); —S(O) 2 (C
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) a —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 NH 2 ° (C 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)NH 2-z (C 1-3 alkyl); —S(O) 2 (C 1-3 alkyl); —S(O) 2 (CH 2 ) d NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —OH; and —O(
  • the ring carbon atoms of ring A are unsubstituted or each R 9 substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom is independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl (in particular methyl), —N(R 12 )(R 13 )(in particular NH 2 ), and —N(R 14 )C( ⁇ O)R 11 (in particular NHC(O)CH 3 ).
  • the ring carbon atoms of ring A are unsubstituted or one ring carbon atom of ring A is substituted with one R 9 being NH 2 or CH 3 , or with two R 9 being CH 3 .
  • each such R 9 may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, —OR 11 , and ⁇ O, wherein each of the C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, and 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alken
  • each such R 9 may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclyl, —OR 11 , and ⁇ O, wherein each of the C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl, and 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 30 .
  • each R 9 when bound to a ring sulfur atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, C 1-3 alkyl, C 4 alkyl, —OR 11′ , and ⁇ O, wherein R 11′ is selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl (e.g., phenyl), 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of the methyl, ethyl, C 1-3 alkyl, C 1-4 alkyl, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 7-membere
  • each R 9 when bound to a ring sulfur atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; benzyl; —OH; ⁇ O; and —O(C 1-3 alkyl), wherein C 1-3 alkyl is methyl, ethyl, propyl or isopropyl.
  • the ring sulfur atom of ring A is unsubstituted or substituted with two ⁇ O groups.
  • the ring sulfur atom of ring A is unsubstituted or ring A contains one sulfur atom which is substituted with two ⁇ O groups (i.e., ring A contains the group —S( ⁇ O) 2 —).
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (O/S-III)
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I) and (O/S-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkylene, C 2-6 alkenylene, C 2-6 alkynylene, —(CH 2 ) a -cyclopropylene-(CH 2 ) b —, wherein each of a and b is independently selected from an integer between 0 and 3, and —(CH 2 ) m —[Y—(CH 2 ) n ] o —, wherein m is 1, 2, or 3, n is 0, 1, or 2, o is 1, 2, or 3, wherein if n is 0 then o is 1; Y is independently selected from O, S, and —N(R 7′ )—, wherein R 7′ is selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkyl
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I) and (O/S-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkylene, C 2-4 alkenylene, C 2-4 alkynylene, —(CH 2 ) a -1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 ) b , wherein each of a and b is independently selected from 0, 1, and 2, and —(CH 2 ) m —[Y—(CH 2 ) n ] o —, wherein m is 1, 2, or 3, n is 0, 1, or 2, o is 1, 2, or 3, wherein if n is 0 then o is 1; Y is independently selected from O, S, and —N(R 7 )—, wherein R 7 is selected from the group consisting of —H, C
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I) and (O/S-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of C 1-3 alkylene, —(CH 2 ) a -1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 ) b —, wherein each of a and b is independently selected from 0 and 1, and —(CH 2 ) m —[Y—(CH 2 ) n ] o —, wherein m is 1 or 2, n is 0, 1, or 2, o is 1 or 2, wherein if n is 0 then o is 1; Y is O, wherein each of the C 1-3 alkylene, 1,1-cyclopropylene, —(CH 2 ) m —, and —(CH 2 ) n — groups is optionally substituted with
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I) and (O/S-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of methylene; 1,1-ethylene; 1,2-ethylene (optionally substituted with one R 30 (such as phenyl) at position 2); trimethylene (—(CH 2 ) 3 —); 2,2-propylene (—C(CH 3 ) 2 —); 2,4-butanediyl; -1,1-cyclopropylene-; —(CH 2 )-1,1-cyclopropylene; -1,1-cyclopropylene-(C 2 )—; —(CH 2 )-1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 )—; —CH 2 O—; —(CH 2 ) 2 O—; and —(CH 2 ) 3 O— (such
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I) and (O/S-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of methylene; 1,1-ethylene; 1,2-ethylene; trimethylene (—(CH 2 ) 3 —); 2,2-propylene (—C(CH 3 ) 2 —); -1,1-cyclopropylene-; —(CH 2 )-1,1-cyclopropylene;-1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 )—; —(CH 2 )-1, 1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 )—; —CH 2 O—; —(CH 2 ) 2 O—; and —(CH 2 ) 3 O— (such as methylene; 1,1-ethylene; 1,1-ethylene; 1,2-ethylene; trimethylene (—(CH 2 ) 3 —):
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I) and (O/S-1)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of C 1 alkylene, C 2 alkylene (in particular 1,2-ethylene or 1,1-ethylene), C 1-3 alkylene (in particular trimethylene), and C 4 alkylene (in particular tetramethylene or 2,4-butanediyl), each of which being optionally substituted with one R 30 .
  • R 1 to R 5 ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I) and (O/S-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of methylene, 1,1-ethylene, 1,2-ethylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene, 2,4-butanediyl, and 2-phenyl-1,2-ethylene (—CH 2 —C(C 6 H 5 )—).
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I) and (O/S-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of methylene and 2-phenyl-1,2-ethylene (—CH 2 —CH(C 6 H 5 )—).
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (O/S-IV)
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I), (O/S-II) and (O/S-III)) or below and G is phenyl which is either unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 (such as between 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 8 .
  • R 8 may be, in each case, selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 0-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C( ⁇ X)XR 11 , —XC( ⁇ X)R 11
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I), (O/S-II) and (O/S-II)) or below and R 8 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O)
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I), (O/S-II) and (O/S-III)) or below and R 8 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1 substituent selected from the group consisting of —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), and NH 2-z (CH 3 ); C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halogen (preferably F), such as —CF 3 , —CH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 CF 2 , or —CH 2 CH 2 F; phenyl; cyclopropyl; 5-membered heterocyclyl (such as pyrrolidinyl); 4-morpholinyl; hornomorpholinyl; 4-piperidinyl; homopiperidiny
  • each R 8 is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; tert-butyl; phenyl; cyclopropyl; pyrrolidinyl (such as 4-pyrrolidinyl); —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ); —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —OCF 3 ; —O-phenyl; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —CN; —NH 2 ; —NH(C 1-3 alkyl); —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)OH; —C( ⁇ O)OH
  • each R 8 is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; phenyl; cyclopropyl; pyrrolidinyl (such as 4-pyrrolidinyl); —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —OCF 3 ; —O-phenyl; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —CN; —NH 2 ; —(C 1-3 alkyl); —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)OH; —C( ⁇ O)O(C
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I), (O/S-II) and (O/S-II)) or below and G is either unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, or 3 R 8 , wherein R 8 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl (in particular methyl or tert-butyl); halogen (in particular F or Cl); —OR 11 (in particular —OCH 3 ); and C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 30 (in particular —CF 3 ).
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I), (O/S-n) and (O/S-II)) or below and G is either unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or 2 R 8 each independently selected from the group consisting of methyl, F, Cl, —OCH 3 , and —CF 3 .
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I), (O/S-II) and (O/S-II)) or below and G is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted phenyl, fluorophenyl (in particular 3-fluorophenyl), chlorophenyl (in particular 2-, 3- or 4-chlorophenyl), methylphenyl (in particular 2- or 3-methylphenyl), tert-butylphenyl (in particular 4-tert-butylphenyl), methoxyphenyl (in particular 3-methoxyphenyl), (trifluoromethyl)phenyl (in particular 3- or 4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl), difluorophenyl (in particular 2,4- or 2,6-difluorophenyl), dichlorophenyl (in particular 2,
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I), (O/S-II) and (O/S-UI)) or below and G is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted phenyl, 2-chlorophenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 3-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 2,6-difluorophenyl, 3,4-dichlorophenyl, 4-chloro-2-fluorophenyl, and 3,5-dimethylphenyl.
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (O/S-V)
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I), (O/S-II), (O/S-III) and (O/S-V)) or below and each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 is H.
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I), (O/S-II), (O/S-III) and (O/S-IV)) or below and at least one of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 is different from H.
  • R 2 is different from H and each of R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 is H; or R 3 is different from H and each of R 2 , R 1 , and R 5 is H; or R 4 is different from H and each of R 2 , R 3 , and R 1 is H; or R 3 is different from H and each of R 2 , R 3 , and R 4 is H; or both of R 2 and R 5 are different from H and both of R 4 and R 5 are H; or both of R 2 and R are different from H and both of R 3 and R 5 are H; or both of R 2 and R 5 are different from H (preferably in this embodiment R 2 and R are the same) and both of R 3 and R 4 are H; or both of R 3 and R 4 are different from H (preferably in this embodiment R 3 and R 4 are the same) and both of R 2 and R 5 are H; or each of R 1 , R 3 , and R 4 is different from H and R 5 is H; or each of R 2 , R 3 , and R 5 is H;
  • each of R 2 to R 1 if it does not join together with another of R 2 to R 5 to form a ring, is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N
  • each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 if it does not join together with another of R 2 to R 5 to form a ring, may be independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ O)R, —C( ⁇ O)OR 11 , —
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I), (O/S-II), (O/S-III), and (O/S-V)) or below and each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 , if it does not join together with another of R 2 to R 5 to form a ring, is independently selected from the group consisting of H; C 1-4 alkyl; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1 substituent selected from the group consisting of —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), and —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halogen (preferably F), such as —CF 3 , —CH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 CHF 2 , or —CH 2 CH 2 F; phenyl; cyclopropy
  • each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 if it does not join together with another of R 2 to R 5 to form a ring, is independently selected from the group consisting of H; methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; phenyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —OCF 3 ; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —CN; —NH 2 ; —NH(C 1-3 alkyl); —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C(C(C( ⁇
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I), (O/S-II), (O/S-II), and (O/S-IV)) or below and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H—, C 1-4 alkyl, and halogen, wherein the C 1-4 alkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 30 (in particular wherein R 2 and R 5 are each —H)
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I), (O/S-II), (O/S-III), and (O/S-IV)) or below and R 2 , R 3 , R 4
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I), (O/S-II), (O/S-III), and (O/S-IV)) or below and R 2 and R 5 are each —H; R 3 is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, and Cl; and R 4 is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, and Cl.
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I), (O/S-II), (O/S-III), and (O/S-IV)) or below and (i) R 2 to R 5 are each —H; or (ii) R 2 and R 5 are each —H, and both of R 3 and R 4 are F, Cl, or methyl.
  • a ring is formed by (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5
  • said ring preferably is a 3- to 7-membered ring (e.g., a ring having 5 or 6 members) which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the ring, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 .
  • the ring may be an aromatic, cycloaliphatic, heteroaromatic, or heterocyclic ring, wherein the heteroaromatic/heterocyclic ring contains 1 or 2 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of O, S, and N(R 40 ), wherein R 40 is selected from the group consisting of R 11 , —OR 11 , —NH y R 20 2-y , and —S(O) 1-2 R 11 , wherein R 11 , R 20 , and y are as defined above.
  • the ring formed by (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5 is a 5- or 6-membered aromatic, cycloaliphatic, heteroaromatic, or heterocyclic ring, wherein the heteroaromatic/heterocyclic ring contains 1 or 2 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of O, S, and N, wherein at least one heteroatom is N.
  • the ring formed by (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5 is selected from the group consisting of cyclopentadiene, furan, pyrrole, thiophene, imidazole, pyrazole, oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, dioxole (e.g., 1,3-dioxole), benzene, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, dioxine (e.g., 1,4-dioxine), 1,2,3-triazine, 1,2,4-triazine, and di- or tetrahydro forms of each of the foregoing.
  • cyclopentadiene furan, pyrrole, thiophene, imidazole, pyrazole, oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, diox
  • the ring formed (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5 is cyclopentene (such as 2,3-dihydrocyclopentadiene), dioxole (such as 1,3-dioxole, optionally substituted at position 2 with one or two halogen atoms (such as F)), or dioxine (such as 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]-dioxine).
  • the total number of rings formed by (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5 is 0 or 1.
  • the remaining R 2 to R 5 which do not join together to form a ring may be selected from —H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C( ⁇ X)XR 11 , —XC( ⁇ X)R 11 , and —XC( ⁇ X)XR 11 , wherein each of the C 1-6 alkyl
  • R 2 and R 5 may be the same and/or R 3 and R 4 may be the same.
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I), (O/S-II), (O/S-III), and (O/S-IV)) or below and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-4 alkyl, and halogen, wherein the C 1-4 alkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 10 (in particular wherein R 2 and R 5 are each —H), or R 3 and R 4 may join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a 5- or 6-membered ring which is optionally substituted with one or two independently selected R 30 .
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I), (O/S-II), (O/S-II), and (O/S-IV)) or below and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, Cl, and CF 3 (in particular wherein R 2 and R 5 are each —H), or R 3 and R 4 may join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a dioxole or dioxine ring which is optionally substituted with one or two independently selected halogens (in particular F).
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I), (O/S-II), (O/S-III), and (O/S-IV)) or below and R 2 and R 5 are each —H; R 3 is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, and Cl; and R 4 is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, and Cl; or R 3 and R 4 may join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a dioxole (in particular 1,3-dioxole) or dioxine (in particular 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]-dioxine) ring, wherein the dioxole ring is optionally substituted with two F.
  • dioxole in particular 1,3-dioxole
  • dioxine in particular 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]-dioxine
  • ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (O/S-I), (O/S-II), (O/S-III), and (O/S-IV)) or below and (i) R to R 1 are each —H; (ii) R 2 and R 5 are each —H, and both of R and R 4 are F, Cl, or methyl, or (iii) R 2 and R 5 are each —H, and R 3 and R 4 join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a 2,2-difluoro-1,3-dioxole ring or a 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]-dioxine ring.
  • R 30 in each case, may be a typical 1 st , 2 nd , or 3 rd level substituent as specified above and may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 5- or 6-membered cycloalkyl, 5-, 6-, or 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —S(C 1-3 alkyl), —NH 2 , —NH(C 1-3 alkyl), —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 , —NH
  • R 30 may be selected from the group consisting of phenyl, firanyl, pyrrolyl, thienyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, partially and completely hydrogenated forms of the forgoing groups, morpholino, C 1-3 alkyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —OH, —OCH 3 , —OCF 3 , —SCH 3 , —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z , —C( ⁇ O)OH, and —C( ⁇ O)OCH 3 , wherein z is 0, 1, or 2.
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (C-I)
  • E is —N(R 6 )—
  • L is selected from the group consisting of C 1-10 alkylene, C 2-10 alkenylene, C 2-10 alkynylene, 1,1-(CH 2 ) a -cyclopropylene-(CH 2 ) b —, wherein each of a and b is independently selected from an integer between 0 and 3, and —(CH 2 ) n —[Y—(CH 2 ) n ] o -, wherein m is an integer between 1 and 6, n is an integer between 0 and 3, o is an integer between 1 and 3, wherein if n is 0 then o is 1; Y is independently selected from O, S, and —N(R 7 )—; and each of the C 1-10 alkylene, C 2-10 alkenylene, C 2-10 alkynylene, 1,1-cyclopropylene, —(CH 2 ) m —, and —(CH 2 ) n — groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum
  • G is phenyl, optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 independently selected R 8 ;
  • ring A is a monocyclic 3- to 10-membered cycloalkylene, optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 9 ;
  • R 1 is H
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )(OR 11 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 R 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —OS(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 0-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ),
  • R 2 and R 3 may join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a ring which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the ring, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ;
  • R 6 is H
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, —OR 11 , and —NHR 20 , wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ;
  • R 8 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )(OR 11 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 R, —OS(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —OS(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , N 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C( ⁇ X)
  • R 9 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 R 11 , —OS(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —OS(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 OR 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C( ⁇ X)XR 11 , —XC( ⁇ X)
  • X is independently selected from O, S, and N(R 14 );
  • R 11 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl, wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ;
  • R 12 and R 13 are, in each case, independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl, or R 12 and R 13 may join together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached to form the group —N ⁇ CR 15 R 16 , wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ; R 14 is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alky
  • R 15 and R 16 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, and —NH y R 20 2-y , or R 15 and R 16 may join together with the atom to which they are attached to form a ring which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the ring, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 , wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroary
  • y is an integer from 0 to 2;
  • R 20 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl, wherein each of the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl group, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 ; and R 30 is a 1 st level substituent and is, in each case, independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl,
  • R 71 , R 72 , and R 73 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of the C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from the group consisting of C 1-3 alkyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —OCF 3 , ⁇ O, —S
  • R 81 , R 82 , and R 83 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 3- to 6-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 6-membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of the C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 3- to 6-membered cycloalkyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, and 3- to 6-membered heterocyclyl groups is optionally substituted with one, two or three substituents selected from the group consisting of C 1-3 alkyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —OCF 3 , ⁇ O, —S(C
  • X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from O, S, and N(R 84 ), wherein R 84 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl,
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (C-II)
  • R 1 to R 5 , E, L and G are as defined above or below and the optionally substituted monocyclic ring A is 3- to 8-membered, preferably 4-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered, more preferably 6- or 7-membered.
  • ring A as such is unsaturated (i.e., the 3 to 10 members of ring A constitute 1, 2, or 3 (preferably 1 or 2, most preferably 1) double bonds within the ring) but is not aromatic.
  • ring A is saturated (i.e., ring A as such is free of unsaturation within the ring); however, if ring A is substituted by one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) R 9 , R 9 may be unsaturated (i.e., may contain double and/or triple bonds and or one or more (e.g., 1, 2. or 3) aromatic ring(s)).
  • 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2
  • R 9 may be unsaturated (i.e., may contain double and/or triple bonds and or one or more (e.g., 1, 2. or 3) aromatic ring(s)).
  • ring A may be selected from the group consisting of cyclohexylene, cycloheptylene, cyclopropylene, cyclobutylene, cyclopentylene, cyclooctylene, cyclohexenylene, cycloheptenylene, cyclopentenylene, cyclooctenylene and their regioisomers, each of which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 9 .
  • ring A is selected from the group consisting of cyclohexylene, cycloheptylene, cyclopropylene, cyclobutylene, cyclopentylene, and cyclooctylene, each of which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 9 .
  • ring A is selected from the group consisting of cyclohexylene, cycloheptylene, cyclopentylene, and cyclooctylene, each of which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to ring A, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 9 .
  • ring A may be unsubstituted.
  • each such R 9 may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O)
  • each R 9 may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R)S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ O)R 11 , —C( ⁇ O)OR 11 , —C( ⁇ O)SR 11 , —C( ⁇ O)N(R 14
  • each R 1 is independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1 substituent selected from the group consisting of —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z , morpholinyl (e.g., 4-morpholinyl), piperazinyl (e.g., 1-piperazinyl), and N-methylpiperazinyl (e.g., 4-methylpiperazin-1-yl); C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halogen (preferably F), such as —CF 3 , —CH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 CHF 2 , or —CH 2 CH 2 F; —O(C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halogen (preferably F)), such as —OCF 3 , —OCH 2 CF 3 , —OCH 2 CHF 2 , or —OCH 2 CH 2 F; cyclopropy
  • each R 9 is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; tert-butyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —O(CH 2 ) d —N 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; —(CH 2 ) d -(4-morpholinyl); —(CH 2 ) d -(1-piperazinyl); —(CH 2 ) d -(4-methylpiperazin-1-yl); 4-morpholinyl; 4-piperazinyl; 4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —NHC( ⁇
  • each R is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; —NH 2 ; —N(C 1-3 alkyl); —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 ; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 N 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)NH 2-z (C 1-3 alkyl) z ; —S(O) 2 (C 1-3 alkyl); —S(O) 2 (CH 2 ) d NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z
  • each R 9 when substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —C( ⁇ O)CH; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)NH 2-z (C 1-3 alkyl) z ; —S(O) 2 (C 1-3 alkyl); —S(O) 2 (CH 2 ) d NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —OH; and —O
  • the ring carbon atoms of ring A are unsubstituted or each R 9 substituting a hydrogen atom bound to a ring carbon atom is independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl (in particular methyl), —N(R 12 )(R 13 )(in particular NH 2 ), and —N(R 14 )C( ⁇ O)R 11 (in particular NHC(O)CH 3 ).
  • the ring carbon atoms of ring A are unsubstituted or one ring carbon atom of ring A is substituted with one R 9 being NH 2 or CH 3 , or with two R being CH 3 .
  • R 9 is bound to ring A at position 3 if ring A is 4-membered; at position 3 or 4 if ring A is 5-membered; at position 3, 4, or 5 if ring A is 6-membered; at position 3, 4, 5, or 6 if ring A is 7-membered; or at position 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 if ring A is 8-membered.
  • R 1 is bound to ring A at position 3 if ring A is 4- or 5-membered; at position 3 or 4 (preferably 4) if ring A is 6- or 7-membered; or at position 3, 4, or 5 if ring A is 8-membered.
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (C-III)
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I) and (C-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkylene, C 2-6 alkenylene, C 2-6 alkynylene, —(CH 2 ) a -cyclopropylene-(CH 2 ) b —, wherein each of a and b is independently selected from an integer between 0 and 3, and —(CH 2 ) z -[Y—(CH 2 ), ] o -, wherein m is 1, 2, or 3, n is 0, 1, or 2, o is 1, 2, or 3, wherein if n is 0 then o is 1; Y is independently selected from O, S, and —N(R 7 )—, wherein R 7′ is selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 3- to 7
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I) and (C-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkylene, C 2-4 alkenylene, C 2-4 alkynylene, —(CH 2 ) a -1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 ) b , wherein each of a and b is independently selected from 0, 1, and 2, and —(CH 2 ) m —[Y—(CH 2 ) n ] o -, wherein m is 1, 2, or 3, n is 0, 1, or 2, o is 1, 2, or 3, wherein if n is 0 then o is 1; Y is independently selected from O, S, and —N(R 7′ )—, wherein R 7′ is selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-3 alkyl
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I) and (C-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of C 1-3 alkylene, —(CH 2 ) a -1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 ) b —, wherein each of a and b is independently selected from 0 and 1, and —(CH 2 ) m —[Y—(CH 2 ) n ] o —, wherein m is 1 or 2, n is 0, 1, or 2, o is 1 or 2, wherein if n is 0 then o is 1; Y is O, wherein each of the C 1-3 alkylene, 1,1-cyclopropylene, —(CH 2 ) m —, and —(CH 2 ) n -groups is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I) and (C-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of methylene; 1,1-ethylene; 1,2-ethylene (optionally substituted with one R 30 (such as phenyl) at position 2); trimethylene (—(CH 2 ) 3 —); 2,2-propylene (—C(CH 3 ) 2 —); 2,4-butanediyl; -1,1-cyclopropylene-; —(CH 2 )-1,1-cyclopropylene; -1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 ) 3 ; —(CH 2 )-1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 )—; —CH 2 O—; —(CH 2 ) 2 O—; and —(CH 2 ) 3 O— (such as methylene
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I) and (C-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of methylene; 1,1-ethylene; 1,2-ethylene; trimethylene (—(CH 2 ) 3 —); 2,2-propylene (—C(CH 3 ) 2 —); -1,1-cyclopropylene-; —(CH 2 )-1,1-cyclopropylene;-1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 )—; —(CH 2 )-1,1-cyclopropylene-(CH 2 )—; —CH 2 O—; —(CH 2 ) 2 O—; and —(CH 2 ) 3 O— (such as methylene; 1,1-ethylene; 1,2-ethylene; trimethylene (—(CH 2 ) 3 —); 2,2-propylene (—C(CH 3
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I) and (C-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of C 1 alkylene, C 2 alkylene (in particular 1,2-ethylene or 1,1-ethylene), C 1-3 alkylene (in particular trimethylene), and C 4 alkylene (in particular tetramethylene or 2,4-butanediyl), each of which being optionally substituted with one R 30 .
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I) and (C-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of methyl-ethylene, 1,2-ethylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene, 2,4-butanediyl, and 2-phenyl-1,2-ethylene (—CH 2 —CH(C 6 H 5 )—)
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I) and (C-II)) or below and L is selected from the group consisting of methylene and 2-phenyl-1,2-ethylene (—CH 2 —CH(C 6 H 5 )—).
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (C-IV)
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I), (C-II) and (C-III)) or below and G is phenyl which is either unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 (such as between 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 8 .
  • R 8 may be, in each case, selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) O-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C( ⁇ X)XR 11 , —XC( ⁇ X)R 11 , and —XC
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I), (C-II) and (C-III)) or below and R 8 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I), (C-II) and (C-III)) or below and R 8 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1 substituent selected from the group consisting of —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), and —NH 2 —(CH 3 ) z ; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halogen (preferably F), such as —CF 3 , —CH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 CHF 2 , or —CH 2 CH 2 F; phenyl; cyclopropyl; 5-membered heterocyclyl (such as pyrrolidinyl); 4-morpholinyl; homornorpholinyl; 4-piperidinyl; homopiperidyl
  • each R 5 is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; tert-butyl; phenyl; cyclopropyl; pyrrolidinyl (such as 4-pyrrolidinyl); —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ), —CF 3 ; —OCF 3 ; —O-phenyl; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 —CH 2 CH 2 F; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —CN, —NH 2 ; —NH 2-z (C 1-3 alkyl); —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 H 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)OH; ——CH 2
  • each R 8 is independently selected from the group consisting of methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; phenyl; cyclopropyl; pyrrolidinyl (such as 4-pyrrolidinyl); —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —OCF 3 ; —O-phenyl; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —CN; —NH 2 ; NH(C 1-3 alkyl); —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C( ⁇ O)OH; —C( ⁇ O)O(C
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I), (C-I) and (C-III)) or below and G is either unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, or 3 R 5 , wherein R 5 is, in each case, selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl (in particular methyl or tert-butyl); halogen (in particular F or Cl); —OR 11 (in particular —OCH 3 ); and C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 30 (in particular —CF 3 ).
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I), (C-II) and (C-III)) or below and G is either unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or 2 R 8 each independently selected from the group consisting of methyl, F, Cl, —OCH 3 , and —CF 3 .
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I), (C-II) and (C-III)) or below and G is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted phenyl, fluorophenyl (in particular 3-fluorophenyl), chlorophenyl (in particular 2-, 3- or 4-chlorophenyl), methylphenyl (in particular 2- or 3-methylphenyl), tert-butylphenyl (in particular 4-tert-butylphenyl), methoxyphenyl (in particular 3-methoxyphenyl), (trifluoromethyl)phenyl (in particular 3- or 4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl), difluorophenyl (in particular 2,4- or 2,6-difluorophenyl), dichlorophenyl (in particular 2,4- or 3,4-dich
  • R 1 to R 5 , ring A, E, and L are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I), (C-II) and (C-III)) or below and G is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted phenyl, 2-chlorophenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 3-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 2,6-difluorophenyl, 3,4-dichlorophenyl, 4-chloro-2-fluorophenyl, and 3,5-dimethylphenyl.
  • the spiroquinoxaline derivative has the general formula (C-V)
  • R 11 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I), (C-II), (C-III) and (C-IV)) or below and each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R is H.
  • R 1 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I), (C-II), (C-III) and (C-IV)) or below and at least one of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 is different from H.
  • R 2 is different from H and each of R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 is H; or R 3 is different from H and each of R 2 , R 4 , and R 5 is H; or R 4 is different from H and each of R 2 , R 3 , and R 5 is H; or R 5 is different from H and each of R 2 , R 3 , and R 4 is H; or both of R 2 and R 3 are different from H and both of R 4 and R 5 are H; or both of R 2 and R 4 are different from H and both of R 3 and R 5 are H; or both of R 2 and R 5 are different from H (preferably in this embodiment R 2 and R 5 are the same) and both of R 3 and R 4 are H; or both of PR and R 4 are different from H (preferably in this embodiment R 3 and R 4 are the same) and both of R 2 and R 5 are H; or each of R 2 , R 3 , and R 4 is different from H and R 5 is H; or each of R 2 , R 3 and R 5 is H; or
  • each of R 2 to R 5 if it does not join together with another of R 2 to R 5 to form a ring, is independently selected from the group consisting of —H , C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 12 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ),
  • each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 if it does not join together with another of R 2 to R 5 to form a ring, may be independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R, —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ O)R 11 , —C( ⁇ O)OR 11 , —
  • R 11 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I), (C-II), (C-III), and (C-IV)) or below and each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 , if it does not join together with another of R 2 to R 3 to form a ring, is independently selected from the group consisting of H; C 1-4 alkyl; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1 substituent selected from the group consisting of —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), and —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; C 1-4 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halogen (preferably F), such as —CF 3 , —CH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 CHF 2 , or —CH 2 CH 2 F; phenyl; cyclopropyl; 5-memberedheterocycl
  • each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 if it does not join together with another of R 2 to R 5 to form a ring, is independently selected from the group consisting of H; methyl; ethyl; isopropyl; phenyl; cyclopropyl; —(CH 2 ) d —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —(CH 2 ) d —O(CH 3 ); —CF 3 ; —OCF 3 ; —CH 2 CF 3 ; —CH 2 CHF 2 ; —CH 2 CH 2 F; halogen (in particular, —F, —Cl, —Br); —CN; —NH 2 ; —N(C 1-3 alkyl); —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ; —C( ⁇ O)CH 2 NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z ; —C(C( ⁇ O)
  • R 11 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I), (C-II), (C-III), and (C-IV)) or below and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and Rare independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-4 alkyl, and halogen, wherein the C 1-4 alkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 30 (in particular wherein R 2 and R 5 are each —H).
  • R, ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I), (C-II), (C-II), and (C-IV)) or below and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, Cl, and CF 3 (in particular wherein R 2 and R 5 are each —H).
  • R 11 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I), (C-I), (C-II), and (C-IV)) or below and R 2 and R 5 are each —H; R is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, and Cl; and R 4 is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, and Cl.
  • R 11 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I), (C-II), (C-III), and (C-IV)) or below and (i) R 2 to R 5 are each —H; or (ii) R 2 and R 5 are each —H, and both of R 3 and R 4 are F, Cl, or methyl.
  • a ring is formed by (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5
  • said ring preferably is a 3- to 7-membered ring (e.g., a ring having 5 or 6 members) which is optionally substituted with one or more (such as 1 to the maximum number of hydrogen atoms bound to the ring, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or up to 10, such as between 1 to 5, 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 or 2) independently selected R 30 .
  • the ring may be an aromatic, cycloaliphatic, heteroaromatic, or heterocyclic ring, wherein the heteroaromatic/heterocyclic ring contains 1 or 2 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of O, S, and N(R 40 ), wherein R 40 is selected from the group consisting of R 11 , —OR 11 , —NH y R 20 2-y , and —S(O) 1-2 R 11 , wherein R 11 , R 21 , and y are as defined above.
  • the ring formed by (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5 is a 5- or 6-membered aromatic, cycloaliphatic, heteroaromatic, or heterocyclic ring, wherein the heteroaromatic/heterocyclic ring contains 1 or 2 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of O, S, and N, wherein at least one heteroatom is N.
  • the ring formed by (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 5 is selected from the group consisting of cyclopentadiene, furan, pyrrole, thiophene, imidazole, pyrazole, oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, dioxole (e.g., 1,3-dioxole), benzene, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, dioxine (e.g., 1,4-dioxine), 1,2,3-triazine, 1,2,4-triazine, and di- or tetrahydro forms of each of the foregoing.
  • cyclopentadiene furan, pyrrole, thiophene, imidazole, pyrazole, oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, diox
  • the ring formed (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R is cyclopentene (such as 2,3-dihydrocyclopentadiene), dioxole (such as 1,3-dioxole, optionally substituted at position 2 with one or two halogen atoms (such as F)), or dioxine (such as 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]-dioxine).
  • the total number of rings formed by (i) R 2 and R 3 , (ii) R 3 and R 4 , and/or (iii) R 4 and R 1 is 0 or 1.
  • the remaining R 2 to R which do not join together to form a ring may be selected from —H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, 3- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CN, —OR 11 , —N(R 12 )(R 11 ), —S(O) 0-2 R 11 , —S(O) 1-2 N(R 12 )(R 13 ), —N(R 11 )S(O) 1-2 R 11 , —NR 11 S(O) 1-2 N)(R 12 )(R 13 ), —C( ⁇ X)R 11 , —C( ⁇ X)XR 11 , —XC( ⁇ X)R, and —XC( ⁇ X)XR 11 , wherein each of the C 1-6 alkyl, C
  • R 2 and R may be the same and/or RP and R 4 may be the same.
  • R, ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I), (C-II), (C-III), and (C-V)) or below and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, C 1-4 alkyl, and halogen, wherein the C 1-4 alkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 30 (in particular wherein R 2 and R 5 are each —H), or R 3 and R 4 may join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a 5- or 6-membered ring which is optionally substituted with one or two independently selected R 30 .
  • R 11 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I), (C-II), (C-III), and (C-IV)) or below and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, Cl, and CF 3 (in particular wherein R 2 and R 5 are each —H), or R 3 and R 4 may join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a dioxole or dioxine ring which is optionally substituted with one or two independently selected halogens (in particular F).
  • R 11 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I), (C-II), (C-II), and (C-IV)) or below and R 2 and R 5 are each —H; R 3 is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, and Cl; and R 4 is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, F, and Cl; or R 3 and R 4 may join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a dioxole (in particular, 3-dioxole) or dioxine (in particular 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]-dioxine) ring, wherein the dioxole ring is optionally substituted with two F.
  • dioxole in particular, 3-dioxole
  • dioxine in particular 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]-dioxine
  • R 11 , ring A, E, L and G are as defined above (in particular with respect to formulas (C-I), (C-II), (C-III), and (C-IV)) or below and (i) R 2 to R 5 are each —H; (ii) R 2 and R 5 are each —H, and both of R 3 and R 4 are F, Cl, or methyl, or (iii) R 2 and R 5 are each —H, and R 3 and R 4 join together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a 2,2-difluoro-1,3-dioxole ring or a 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]-dioxine ring.
  • R 30 in each case, may be a typical 1 st , 2 nd , or 3 rd level substituent as specified above and may be independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-4 alkyl, C 2-4 alkenyl, C 2-4 alkynyl, 5- or 6-membered aryl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, 5- or 6-membered cycloalkyl, 5-, 6-, or 7-membered heterocyclyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —CN, azido, —NO 2 , —OH, —O(C 1-3 alkyl), —S(C 1-3 alkyl), —NH 2 , —N(C 1-3 alkyl), —N(C 1-3 alkyl) 2 , —NHS(O) 2 (C 1-3 al
  • R 30 may be selected from the group consisting of phenyl, furanyl, pyrrolyl, thienyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, partially and completely hydrogenated forms of the forgoing groups, morpholino, C 1-3 alkyl, halogen, —CF 3 , —OH, —OCH 3 , —OCF 3 , —SCH 3 , —NH 2-z (CH 3 ) z , —C( ⁇ O)OH, and —C( ⁇ O)OCH 3 , wherein z is 0, 1, or 2.
  • the compound of the invention is selected from the compounds shown in Tables 1-N, 1-O/S, and 1-C.
  • the compounds of the present invention encompass not only the compounds as depicted but also their solvates (e.g., hydrates), salts (in particular, pharmaceutically acceptable salts), complexes, polymorphs, crystalline forms, non-crystalline forms, amorphous forms, racemic mixtures, non-racemic mixtures, diastereomers, enantiomers, tautomers, unlabeled forms, isotopically labeled forms, pro
  • the compounds of the invention do not encompass compounds of formula (I)
  • R 2 to R 5 are each H, L is —CH 2 —,
  • R 9 is —S(O) 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , (cyclopropyl)sulfonyl, or (3-pyridinyl)sulfonyl, or R 9 is —C(O)Z, wherein Z is methyl, tert-butyl, methoxymethyl, 2-methoxyethyl, —CH 2 NHC(O)CH 3 , 2-methoxyethylamino, morpholin-4-ylmethyl, 2-furanylmethylamino, (2-methyl-1H-imidazol-1-yl)methyl, 2-franyl, 3-franyl, pyridin-2-yl, pyridin-3-yl, pyridin-4-yl, pyrazin-2-yl, 1-ethyl-1H-pyrazol-3-yl, or 1-ethyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl;
  • R 9 is (1,3,5-trimethyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)sulfonyl or —C(O)Z, wherein Z is 2-methoxyethylamino, methoxycarbonylmethylamino, (2-trifluoromethylphenyl)amino, 5-chloro-1H-indol-2-yl, 4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H-indazol-3-yl, or 3-(2-thienyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl;
  • G is 2-chlorophenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 3-fluorophenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 2-methylphenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 3-methoxyphenyl, or 4-methoxyphenyl, and ring A is
  • R 9 is (3,5-dimethyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)sulfonyl
  • R 9 is —C(O)Z, wherein Z is 6-methoxy-1H-indol-2-yl or 3,4-dimethoxyphenyl; or
  • G is 4-chlorophenyl, and ring A is
  • R 9 is —C(O)Z, wherein Z is 1-methyl-2-(2-methyl-1H-imidazol-1-yl)ethyl;
  • R 2 and R 5 are both H, L is —CH 2 —, and
  • R 3 and R 4 are both H, and G is 3-methylphenyl, 3-methoxyphenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, or 4-fluorophenyl; or
  • R 3 and R 4 are both methyl, and G is 4-fluorophenyl;
  • R 2 and R 5 are both H, L is —CH 2 —, and
  • G is unsubstituted phenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 3-methoxyphenyl, or 4-methoxyphenyl;
  • G is 4-methylphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl, or 3-methoxyphenyl;
  • G is unsubstituted phenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 2-chlorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 3-chloro-4-fluorophenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl, or 4-trifluoromethylphenyl;
  • G is unsubstituted phenyl, 2-methylphenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 3-fluorophenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 2-chlorophenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl, 3-methoxyphenyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, or 4-trifluoromethylphenyl;
  • G is 3-fluorophenyl or 3,5-difluorophenyl
  • G is 3-fluorophenyl or 3-methoxyphenyl
  • G is substituted phenyl, 2-methylphenyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 3-fluorophenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, or 3-methoxyphenyl.
  • the compounds of the invention have the general formula (N-I)(such as (N-II), (N-III), (N-IV), or (N-V)) but do not encompass compounds of formula (N-I) wherein R 2 to R 5 are each H, L is —CH 2 —,
  • R 9 is —S(O) 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , (cyclopropyl)sulfonyl, or (3-pyridinyl)sulfonyl, or R 9 is —C(O)Z, wherein Z is methyl, tert-butyl, methoxymethyl, 2-methoxyethyl, —CH 2 NHC(O)CH 3 , 2-methoxyethylamino, morpholin-4-ylmethyl, 2-furanylmethylamino, (2-methyl-1H-imidazol-1-yl)methyl, 2-furanyl, 3-furanyl, pyridin-2-yl, pyridin-3-yl, pyridin-4-yl, pyrazin-2-yl, 1-ethyl-1H-pyrazol-3-yl, or 1-ethyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl;
  • R 9 is (1,3,5-trimethyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)sulfonyl or —C(O)Z, wherein Z is 2-methoxyethylamino, methoxycarbonylmethylamino, (2-trifluoromethylphenyl)amino, 5-chloro-1H-indol-2-yl, 4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H-indazol-3-yl, or 3-(2-thienyl)-1H pyrazol-5-yl;
  • G is 2-chlorophenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 3-fluorophenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 2-methylphenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 3-methoxyphenyl, or 4-methoxyphenyl, and ring A is
  • R 9 is (3,5-dimethyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)sulfonyl
  • R 9 is —C(O)Z, wherein Z is 6-methoxy-1H-indol-2-yl or 3,4-diethoxyphenyl; or
  • G is 4-chlorophenyl, and ring A is
  • R 9 is —C(O)Z, wherein Z is 1-methyl-2-(2-methyl-H-imidazol-1-yl)ethyl.
  • the compounds of the invention have the general formula (O/S-I)(such as (O/S-II), (O/S-III), (O/S-IV), or (O/S-V)) but do not encompass compounds of formula (O/S-I) wherein ring A is
  • R 2 and R 5 are both H, L is —CH 2 —, and
  • R 3 and R 4 are both H, and G is 3-methylphenyl, 3-methoxyphenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, or 4-fluorophenyl or
  • R 3 and R 4 are both methyl, and G is 4-fluorophenyl.
  • the compounds of the invention have the general formula (C-I)(such as (C-II), (C-III), (C-IV), or (C-V)) but do not encompass compounds of formula (C-I) wherein R 2 and R 5 are both H, L is —CH 2 —, and
  • G is unsubstituted phenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 3-methoxyphenyl, or 4-methoxyphenyl;
  • G is 4-methylphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl, or 3-methoxyphenyl;
  • G is unsubstituted phenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 2-chlorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 3-chloro-4-fluorophenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl, or 4-trifluoromethylphenyl;
  • G is unsubstituted phenyl, 2-methylphenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 3-fluorophenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 2-chlorophenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl, 3-methoxyphenyl, 4-ethoxyphenyl, or 4-trifluoromethylphenyl;
  • G is 3-fluorophenyl or 3,5-difluorophenyl
  • G is 3-fluorophenyl or 3-methoxyphenyl
  • G is unsubstituted phenyl, 2-methylphenyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 3-fluorophenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, or 3-methoxyphenyl.
  • the compounds of the invention which contain a basic functionality may form salts b a variety of inorganic or organic acids. Exemplary inorganic and organic acids/bases as well as exemplary acid/base addition salts of the compounds of the present invention are given in the definition of “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” in the section “Pharmaceutical composition”, below.
  • the compounds of the invention which contain an acidic functionality may form salts with a variety of inorganic or organic bases.
  • the compounds of the invention which contain both basic and acidic functionalities may be converted into either base or acid addition salt.
  • the neutral forms of the compounds of the invention may be regenerated by contacting the salt with a base or acid and isolating the parent compound in the conventional manner.
  • the compounds of the invention may be in a prodrug form.
  • Prodrugs of the compounds of the invention are those compounds that upon administration to an individual undergo chemical conversion under physiological conditions to provide the compounds of the invention. Additionally, prodrugs can be converted to the compounds of the invention by chemical or biochemical methods in an ex vivo environment. For example, prodrugs can be slowly converted to the compounds of the invention when, for example, placed in a transdermal patch reservoir with a suitable enzyme or chemical reagent.
  • Exemplary prodrugs are esters or amides which are hydrolyzable in vivo.
  • the present invention provides a compound of the invention (in particular those specified above with respect to any of formulas (I), (N-I), (O/S-I), (C-I), (II), (N-II), (O/S-II), (C-II), (II), (N-III), (O/S-III), (C-III), (IV), (N-IV), (O/S-IV), (C-IV), (V), (N-V), (O/S-V), and (C-V)) for use as medicament.
  • a compound of the invention in particular those specified above with respect to any of formulas (I), (N-I), (O/S-I), (C-I), (I), (N-II), (O/S-II), (C-II), (II), (N-III), (O/S-III), (C-III), (IV), (N-IV), (O/S-IV), (C-IV), (V), (N-V), (O/S-V),
  • the compounds of the invention inhibit non-apoptotic regulated cell death and/or reduce oxidative stress but do not inhibit apoptotic cell death.
  • the compounds of the invention are selective inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell death and/or oxidative stress, i.e., they inhibit non-apoptotic regulated cell death and/or oxidative stress, but do not inhibit apoptotic cell death.
  • the compounds of the invention exhibit pharmacological properties (bioavailability, toxicity, side effects, dosing, patient compliance, compatibility, stability, half-life, etc.), which are in at least one aspect superior to the pharmacological properties exhibited by Necrostatin-1 and/or Ferrostatin.
  • the present invention provides a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound as specified above under the heading “Compounds” and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients.
  • the pharmaceutical composition may be administered to an individual by any route, such as enterally or parenterally.
  • compositions according to the present invention are generally applied in “pharmaceutically acceptable amounts” and in “pharmaceutically acceptable preparations”. Such compositions may contain salts, buffers, preserving agents, carriers and optionally other therapeutic agents.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salts” comprise, for example, acid addition salts which may, for example, be formed by mixing a solution of compounds with a solution of a pharmaceutically acceptable acid such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, succinic acid, acetic acid, benzoic acid, citric acid, tartaric acid, carbonic acid or phosphoric acid.
  • suitable pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof may include alkali metal salts (e.g., sodium or potassium salts); alkaline earth metal salts (e.g., calcium or magnesium salts); and salts formed with suitable organic ligands (e.g., ammonium, quaternary ammonium and amine cations formed using counteranions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, alkyl sulfonate and aryl sulfonate).
  • alkali metal salts e.g., sodium or potassium salts
  • alkaline earth metal salts e.g., calcium or magnesium salts
  • suitable organic ligands e.g., ammonium, quaternary ammonium and amine cations formed using counteranions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, alkyl sulfonate and aryl sul
  • Illustrative examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, acetate, adipate, alginate, arginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bicarbonate, bisulfate, bitartrate, borate, bromide, butyrate, calcium edetate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, camsylate, carbonate, chloride, citrate, clavulanate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dihydrochloride, dodecylsulfate, edetate, edisylate, estolate, esylate, ethanesulfonate, formate, fumarate, galactate, galacturonate, gluceptate, glucoheptonate, gluconate, glutamate, glycerophosphate, glycolylarsanilate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, he
  • excipient when used herein is intended to indicate all substances in a pharmaceutical composition which are not active ingredients (e.g., which are therapeutically inactive ingredients that do not exhibit any therapeutic effect in the amount/concentration used), such as, e.g., carriers, binders, lubricants, thickeners, surface active agents, preservatives, emulsifiers, buffers, flavoring agents, colorants, or antioxidants.
  • active ingredients e.g., which are therapeutically inactive ingredients that do not exhibit any therapeutic effect in the amount/concentration used
  • carriers binders, lubricants, thickeners, surface active agents, preservatives, emulsifiers, buffers, flavoring agents, colorants, or antioxidants.
  • compositions according to the present invention may comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carrier includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like that are physiologically compatible.
  • the “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” may be in the form of a solid, semisolid, liquid, or combinations thereof.
  • the carrier is suitable for enteral (such as oral) or parenteral administration (such as intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, spinal or epidermal administration (e.g., by injection or infusion)).
  • the active compound i.e., the compound of the invention, may be coated in a material to protect the compound from the action of acids and other natural conditions that may inactivate the compound.
  • a composition of the present invention can be administered by a variety of methods known in the art. As will be appreciated by the skilled artisan, the route and/or mode of administration will vary depending upon the desired results.
  • the active compounds can be prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid release, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants, transdermal patches, and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Methods for the preparation of such formulations are generally known to those skilled in the art. See, e.g., Sustained and Controlled Release Drug Delivery Systems, J. R. Robinson, ed., Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, 1978.
  • the compound may be administered to an individual in an appropriate carrier, for example, liposomes, or a diluent.
  • suitable diluents include saline and aqueous buffer solutions.
  • Liposomes include water-in-oil-in-water CGF emulsions as well as conventional liposomes (Strejan et al., J. Neuroimmunol. 7: 27 (1984)).
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersions.
  • the use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active compound, use thereof in the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention is contemplated. Supplementary active compounds can also be incorporated into the compositions.
  • compositions typically must be sterile and stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage.
  • the composition can be formulated as a solution, microemulsion, liposome, or other ordered structure suitable to high drug concentration.
  • the carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof.
  • the proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants.
  • isotonic agents for example, sugars, polyalcohols such as mannitol, sorbitol, or sodium chloride in the composition.
  • Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent that delays absorption, for example, monostearate salts and gelatin.
  • Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the active compound in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by sterilization microfiltration.
  • dispersions are prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle that contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above.
  • a sterile vehicle that contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above.
  • the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying (lyophilization) that yield a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
  • Dosage regimens are adjusted to provide the optimum desired response (e.g., a therapeutic response). For example, a single bolus may be administered, several divided doses may be administered over time or the dose may be proportionally reduced or increased as indicated by the exigencies of the therapeutic situation. It is especially advantageous to formulate parenteral compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage.
  • Dosage unit form as used herein refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the individuals to be treated; each unit contains a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier.
  • the specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on (a) the unique characteristics of the active compound and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and (b) the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an active compound for the treatment of sensitivity in individuals.
  • antioxidants examples include: (1) water soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like; (2) oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha-tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
  • water soluble antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like
  • oil-soluble antioxidants such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), le
  • compositions of the present invention include those suitable for enteral administration (such as oral or rectal) or parenteral administration (such as nasal, topical (including vaginal, buccal and sublingual)).
  • enteral administration such as oral or rectal
  • parenteral administration such as nasal, topical (including vaginal, buccal and sublingual)
  • the compositions may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any methods known in the art of pharmacy.
  • the amount of active ingredient in particular, the amount of a compound of the present invention
  • a carrier material to produce a pharmaceutical composition will vary depending upon the individual being treated, and the particular mode of administration.
  • the amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount of the composition which produces a therapeutic effect.
  • the amount of active ingredient in particular, the amount of the compound of the present invention, optionally together with other therapeutically active agents, if present in the pharmaceutical formulations/compositions
  • the amount of active ingredient will range from about 0.01% to about 99%, preferably from about 0.1% to about 70%, most preferably from about 1% to about 30%, wherein the reminder is preferably composed of the one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients.
  • the amount of active ingredient, e.g., a compound of the invention, in a unit dosage form and/or when administered to an individual or used in therapy, may range from about 0.1 mg to about 1000 mg (for example, from about 1 mg to about 500 mg, such as from about 10 mg to about 200 mg) per unit, administration or therapy.
  • a suitable amount of such active ingredient may be calculated using the mass or body surface area of the individual, including amounts of between about 1 mg/Kg and 10 mg/Kg (such as between about 2 mg/Kg and 5 mg/Kg), or between about 1 mg/m 2 and about 400 mg/m 2 (such as between about 3 mg/m 2 and about 350 mg/m 2 or between about 10 mg/m 2 and about 200 mg/m 2 ).
  • compositions of the present invention which are suitable for vaginal administration also include pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
  • Dosage forms for the topical or transdermal administration of compositions of this invention include powders, sprays, ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, solutions, patches and inhalants.
  • the active compound may be mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and with any preservatives, buffers, or propellants which may be required.
  • enteral administration and “administered enterally” as used herein mean that the drug administered is taken up by the stomach and/or the intestine.
  • enteral administration include oral and rectal administration.
  • parenteral administration and “administered parenterally” as used herein mean modes of administration other than enteral administration, usually by injection or topical application, and include, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraosseous, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticular, subcapsular, intracerebral, intracerebroventricular, subarachnoid, intraspinal, epidural and intrasternal administration (such as by injection and/or infusion) as well as topical administration (e.g., epicutaneous, inhalational, or through mucous membranes (such as buccal, sublingual or vaginal)).
  • topical administration e.g., epicutaneous
  • aqueous and non-aqueous carriers examples include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils, such as olive oil, and injectable organic esters, such as ethyl oleate.
  • polyols such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like
  • vegetable oils such as olive oil
  • injectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate.
  • Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions, and by the use of surfactants.
  • compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents, pH buffering agents, and dispersing agents. Prevention of the presence of microorganisms may be ensured both by sterilization procedures, and by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the lie into the compositions. In addition, prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusion of agents which delay absorption such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
  • adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents, pH buffering agents, and dispersing agents.
  • the compounds of the present invention which may be used in a suitable hydrated form, and/or the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, are formulated into pharmaceutically acceptable dosage forms by conventional methods known to those of skill in the art (cf., e.g., Remington, “The Science and Practice of Pharmacy” edited by Allen, Loyd V., Jr., 22 nd edition, Pharmaceutical Sciences, September 2012; Ansel et al, “Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems”, 7 th edition, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins Publishers, 1999).
  • Actual dosage levels of the active ingredients in the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may be varied so as to obtain an amount of the active ingredient which is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration, without being toxic to the patient.
  • the selected dosage level will depend upon a variety of pharmacokinetic factors including the activity of the particular compositions of the present invention employed, the route of administration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion of the particular compound being employed, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds and/or materials used in combination with the particular compositions employed, the age, sex, weight, condition, general health and prior medical history of the patient being treated, and like factors well known in the medical arts.
  • a physician or veterinarian having ordinary skill in the art can readily determine and prescribe the effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition required.
  • the physician or veterinarian could start with doses of the compounds of the invention employed in the pharmaceutical composition at levels lower than that required in order to achieve the desired therapeutic effect and gradually increase the dosage until the desired effect is achieved.
  • a suitable daily dose of a composition of the invention will be that amount of the compound which is the lowest dose effective to produce a therapeutic effect.
  • Such an effective dose will generally depend upon the factors described above. It is preferred that administration be oral, intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, or subcutaneous, preferably administered proximal to the site of the target.
  • the effective daily dose of a pharmaceutical composition may be administered as two, three, four, five, six or more sub-doses administered separately at appropriate intervals throughout the day, optionally, in unit dosage forms. While it is possible for a compound of the present invention to be administered alone, it is preferable to administer the compound as a pharmaceutical formulation/composition.
  • the compounds or compositions of the invention may be administered by infusion, preferably slow continuous infusion over a long period, such as more than 24 hours, in order to reduce toxic side effects.
  • the administration may also be performed by continuous infusion over a period of from 2 to 24 hours, such as of from 2 to 12 hours.
  • Such regimen may be repeated one or more times as necessary, for example, after 6 months or 12 months.
  • the compounds or compositions of the invention are administered by maintenance therapy, such as, e.g., once a week for a period of 6 months or more.
  • the pharmaceutical composition of the invention can take the form of, for example, tablets or capsules prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutical acceptable excipients such as binding agents (e.g., pregelatinised maize starch, polyvinylpyrrolidone, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose), fillers (e.g., lactose, microcrystalline cellulose, calcium hydrogen phosphate), lubricants (e.g., magnesium stearate, talc, silica), disintegrants (e.g., potato starch, sodium starch glycolate), or wetting agents (e.g., sodium lauryl sulphate).
  • binding agents e.g., pregelatinised maize starch, polyvinylpyrrolidone, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose
  • fillers e.g., lactose, microcrystalline cellulose, calcium hydrogen phosphate
  • lubricants e.g., magnesium stearate, talc, silica
  • disintegrants e.g., potato star
  • Liquid preparations for oral administration can be in the form of, for example, solutions, syrups, or suspensions, or can be presented as a dry product for constitution with water or other suitable vehicle before use.
  • Such liquid preparation can be prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable additives such as suspending agents (e.g., sorbitol, syrup, cellulose derivatives, hydrogenated edible fats), emulsifying agents (e.g., lecithin, acacia), non-aqueous vehicles (e.g., almond oil, oily esters, ethyl alcohol, fractionated vegetable oils), preservatives (e.g., methyl or propyl-hydroxycarbonates, sorbic acids).
  • the preparations can also contain buffer salts, flavouring, coloring and sweetening agents as deemed appropriate.
  • Preparations for oral administration can be suitably formulated to give controlled release of the pharmaceutical composition of the invention.
  • the pharmaceutical composition can be formulated as a suppository, with traditional binders and carriers such as triglycerides.
  • Oral formulation can include standard carriers such as pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, cellulose, magnesium carbonate, etc.
  • the pharmaceutical composition of the invention is conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray presentation from a pressurised pack or a nebulizer, with the use of a suitable propellant (e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide, nitrogen, or other suitable gas).
  • a suitable propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide, nitrogen, or other suitable gas.
  • the dosage unit can be determined by providing a valve to deliver a metered amount.
  • Capsules and cartridges of, for example, gelatine, for use in an inhaler or insufflator can be formulated containing a powder mix of the pharmaceutical composition of the invention and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch.
  • the pharmaceutical composition of the invention can be formulated for parenteral administration by injection, for example, by bolus injection or continuous infusion.
  • Formulations for injection can be presented in units dosage form (e.g., in phial, in multi-dose container), and with an added preservative.
  • the pharmaceutical composition of the invention can take such forms as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles, and can contain formulatory agents such as suspending, stabilizing, or dispersing agents.
  • the agent can be in powder form for constitution with a suitable vehicle (e.g., sterile pyrogen-free water) before use.
  • compositions for intravenous administration are solutions in sterile isotonic aqueous buffer.
  • the composition can also include a solubilizing agent and a local anesthetic such as lignocaine to ease pain at the site of the injection.
  • a solubilizing agent such as lignocaine to ease pain at the site of the injection.
  • the ingredients are supplied either separately or mixed together in unit dosage form, for example, as a dry lyophilised powder or water free concentrate in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent.
  • the composition is to be administered by infusion, it can be dispensed with an infusion bottle containing sterile pharmaceutical grade water or saline.
  • an ampoule of sterile water for injection or saline can be provided so that the ingredients can be mixed prior to administration.
  • Therapeutic/pharmaceutical compositions can be administered with medical devices known in the art.
  • a therapeutic/pharmaceutical composition of the invention can be administered with a needleless hypodermic injection device, such as the devices disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,399,163; 5,383,851; 5,312,335; 5,064,413; 4,941,880; 4,790,824; or 4,596,556.
  • a needleless hypodermic injection device such as the devices disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,399,163; 5,383,851; 5,312,335; 5,064,413; 4,941,880; 4,790,824; or 4,596,556.
  • Examples of well-known implants and modules useful in the present invention include those described in: U.S. Pat. No. 4,487,603, which discloses an implantable micro-infusion pump for dispensing medication at a controlled rate; U.S. Pat. No.
  • the compounds of the invention can be formulated to ensure proper distribution in vivo.
  • the blood-brain barrier excludes many highly hydrophilic compounds.
  • they can be formulated, for example, in liposomes.
  • liposomes For methods of manufacturing liposomes, see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,522,811; 5,374,548; and 5,399,331.
  • the liposones may comprise one or more moieties which are selectively transported into specific cells or organs, and thus enhance targeted drug delivery (see, e.g., V. V.
  • Exemplary targeting moieties include folate or biotin (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,416,016 to Low et al.); mannosides (Umezawa et a., (1988) Biochen. Biophys. Res. Commun. 153: 1038); antibodies (P. G. Bloeman et al (1995) FEBS Lett. 357: 140; M. Owais et al. (1995) Antimicrob. Agents Chemother. 39: 180); and surfactant protein A receptor (Briscoe et al. (1995) Am. J. Physiol. 1233: 134).
  • biotin see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,416,016 to Low et al.
  • mannosides Umezawa et a., (1988) Biochen. Biophys. Res. Commun. 153: 1038
  • antibodies P. G. Bloeman et al (19
  • the compounds of the invention are formulated in liposomes.
  • the liposomes include a targeting moiety.
  • the compounds in the liposomes are delivered by bolus injection to a site proximal to the desired area.
  • Such liposome-based composition should be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists, should be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and should be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi.
  • a “therapeutically effective dosage” for therapy/treatment can be measured by objective responses which can either be complete or partial.
  • a complete response (CR) is defined as no clinical, radiological or other evidence of a condition, disorder or disease.
  • a partial response (PR) results from a reduction in disease of greater than 50%.
  • Median time to progression is a measure that characterizes the durability of the objective response.
  • a “therapeutically effective dosage” for therapy/treatment can also be measured by its ability to stabilize the progression of a condition, disorder or disease.
  • the ability of a compound to inhibit, reduce or ameliorate non-apoptotic regulated cell-death and/or to reduce oxidative stress can be evaluated in appropriate animal model systems as such as one or more of those set fourth below.
  • these properties of a compound of the present invention can be evaluated by examining the ability of the compound using in vitro assays known to the skilled practitioner such as one or more of those set fourth below.
  • a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention can cure, heal, alleviate, relieve, alter, remedy, ameliorate, improve or affect the condition, disorder or disease or the symptoms of the condition, disorder or disease or the predisposition toward the condition, disorder or disease in an individual.
  • One of ordinary skill in the art would be able to determine such amounts based on such factors as the individual's size, the severity of the individual's symptoms, and the particular composition or route of administration selected.
  • an injectable composition should be sterile and fluid to the extent that the composition is deliverable by syringe.
  • the carrier can be an isotonic buffered saline solution, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof.
  • the pharmaceutical composition of the invention can also, if desired, be presented in a pack, or dispenser device which can contain one or more unit dosage forms containing the said agent.
  • the pack can for example comprise metal or plastic foil, such as blister pack.
  • the pack or dispenser device can be accompanied with instruction for administration.
  • composition of the invention can be administered as sole active agent or can be administered in combination with other therapeutically and/or cosmetically active agents.
  • the present application provides a compound as specified above under the heading “Compounds” or a pharmaceutical composition as specified above under the heading “Pharmaceutical compositions” for use in therapy.
  • Compounds may be used for the inhibition, reduction or amelioration of non-apoptotic regulated cell death and/or the reduction of oxidative stress in vitro, such as in an isolated cell, an isolated cell culture, or a sample, tissue or organ isolated from an individual.
  • such cell, cell culture, sample, tissue or organ is used in research; while in other embodiments it is exposed to the compound ex-vivo prior to reintroduction to the same (or a different) individual, such as in tissue or organ transplant, and the inhibition, reduction or amelioration of regulated necrosis of such cell, cell culture, sample, tissue or organ takes place when ex-vivo.
  • compositions of the invention may be used in the treatment (including prophylactic treatment) of a condition, disorder or disease:
  • compositions of the invention may be used in the treatment (including prophylactic treatment) of a condition, disorder or disease that is selected from the group consisting of:
  • compositions of the invention may be used in the treatment (including prophylactic treatment) of a condition, disorder or disease that is the result of, arises from or is associated with a circumstance selected from the group consisting of:
  • condition, disorder or disease is not cancer, and/or is not one the result of, arising from or associated with cancer.
  • apoptosis (e.g., as assays in Example B.3) is believed to occur under or as a result of normal physiological conditions or events in a highly programmed manner as part of normal tissue homeostasis and cell turnover; while, conversely, non-apoptotic regulated cell death is thought to be triggered by abnormal physiological conditions or events such as external damaging stimuli and/or oxidative stress.
  • Compounds that inhibit non-apoptotic regulated cell-death but do not appear to inhibit apoptotic cell-death may have preferred utility in the methods and applications of the present invention, as they may not interfere with the individual's (such) innate cell-death mechanism and regulation, but preferentially only that caused by abnormal physiological conditions or events such as external damaging stimuli and/or oxidative stress and/or triggering events of the immune system.
  • condition, disorder or disease is a neurodegenerative disease, including of either or both of the central or peripheral nervous systems, or is a condition or disorder caused by and forms of neurodegeneration, or is a condition or symptom the result of, arising from or associated with such condition, disorder or disease.
  • Exemplary neurodegenerative such conditions or diseases include, but are not limited to, Alzheimer's disease, Huntington's disease, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), HIV-associated dementia, cerebral ischemia, multiple sclerosis, Lewy body disease, Menke's disease, Wilson's disease, Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, Fahr disease, and frontotemporal dementia, amyloidosis, Tay-Sachs disease and periventricular leukomalacia.
  • ALS amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
  • HIV-associated dementia cerebral ischemia
  • multiple sclerosis Lewy body disease
  • Menke's disease Menke's disease
  • Wilson's disease Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease
  • Fahr disease and frontotemporal dementia
  • amyloidosis Tay-Sachs disease and periventricular leukomalacia.
  • the condition, disorder or disease is muscle wasting (e.g., that associated with cancer, AIDS, congestive heart failure, chronic obstructive disease, and necrotizing myopathy of intensive care).
  • the condition, disorder or disease is muscular dystrophies or related diseases (e.g., Becker's muscular dystrophy, Duchenne muscular dystrophy, myotonic dystrophy, limb-girdle muscular dystrophy, Landouzy-Dejerine muscular dystrophy, facioscapulohumeral muscular dystrophy (Steinert's disease), myotonia congenita, Thomsen's disease, and Pompe's disease), or is a condition or symptom the result of, arising from or associated with such condition, disorder or disease.
  • muscular dystrophies or related diseases e.g., Becker's muscular dystrophy, Duchenne muscular dystrophy, myotonic dystrophy, limb-girdle muscular dystrophy, Landouzy-Dejerine muscular dystrophy, facioscap
  • the condition, disorder or disease is cell, tissue, organ or organism intoxication, such as that the result of, arising from or associated with drug treatment, drug overdose or acute poisoning.
  • exemplary circumstances of such intoxication include alcoholism and administration and/or self-administration with, and/or exposure to, illicit drugs (e.g., cocaine, heroin, crack), medical drugs (e.g., anti-cancer agents, paracetamol, antibiotics, adriamycin, NSAID, cyclosporine), chemical toxins (e.g., carbon tetrachloride, cyanide, methanol, ethylene glycol and mustard gas, agrochemicals such as organophosphates and paraquat, and warfare organophosphates), or heavy metals (e.g., lead, mercury).
  • illicit drugs e.g., cocaine, heroin, crack
  • medical drugs e.g., anti-cancer agents, paracetamol, antibiotics, adriamycin, NSAID, cyclospor
  • condition, disorder or disease is the result of, arising from or associated with one or more forms of infection of viruses (e.g., acute, latent and/or persistent), bacteria, fungi, or other microorganisms, or is one in which a reduction in cell-proliferation, or an alteration in cell-differentiation or intracellular signalling, is a causative factor, and include infection e.g., by viruses (e.g., acute, latent and/or persistent), bacteria, fungi, or other microorganisms, and mycoplasma disease.
  • viruses e.g., acute, latent and/or persistent
  • bacteria fungi, or other microorganisms
  • mycoplasma disease e.g., mycoplasma disease.
  • viruses include, but are not limited to, are human immunodeficiency virus (HIV), Epstein-Barr virus (EBV), cytomegalovirus (CMV)(e.g., CMV5), human herpesviruses (HHV)(e.g., HHV6, 7 or 8), herpes simplex viruses (HSV), bovine herpes virus (BHV)(e.g., BHV4), equine herpes virus (EHV)(e.g., EHV2), human T-Cell leukemia viruses (HTLV)5, Varicella-Zoster virus (VZV), measles virus, papovaviruses (JC and BK), hepatitis viruses (E.g., HBV or HCV), myxoma virus, adenovirus, parvoviruses, polyoma virus, influenza viruses, papillomaviruses and poxviruses such as vaccinia virus, and molluscum contagio
  • Such virus may or may not express an apoptosis inhibitor.
  • exemplary diseases caused by viral infection include, but are not limited to, chicken pox, Cytomegalovirus infections, genital herpes, Hepatitis B and C, influenza, and shingles, and rabies.
  • Exemplary bacteria include, but are not limited to, Campylobacter jejuni, Enterobacter species, Enterococcus faecium, Enterococcus faecalis, Escherichia coli (e.g., F. coli O157:H7), Group A streptococci, Haemophilus influenzae, Helicobacter pylori, listeria, Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, S. pneumoniae, Salmonella, Shigella, Staphylococcus aureus, and Staphylococcus epidermidis, and Borrelia and Rickettsia.
  • Exemplary diseases caused by bacterial infection include, but are not limited to, anthrax, cholera, diphtheria, foodborne illnesses, leprosy, meningitis, peptic ulcer disease, pneumonia, sepsis, septic shock, syphilis, tetanus, tuberculosis, typhoid fever, and urinary tract infection, and Lyme disease and Rocky Mountain spotted fever.
  • condition, disorder or disease is the result of, arising from or associated with undesirable inflammation, such as an immune disorder.
  • Exemplary immune disorders include, but are not limited to, autoimmune diseases (for example, diabetes mellitus, arthritis—including rheumatoid arthritis, juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis and psoriatic arthritis-, multiple sclerosis, encephalomyelitis, myasthenia gravis, systemic lupus erythematosis, autoimmune thyroiditis, dermaitis (including atopic dermatitis and eczematous dermatitis), psoriasis, Sjogren's Syndrome, Crohn's disease, aphthous ulcer, ulceris, conjunctivitis, keratoconjunctivitis, ulcerative colitis, asthma, allergic asthma, sepsis and septic shock, inflammatory bowel disorder, cutaneous lupus erythematosus, scleroderma, vaginitis, proctitis, drug eruptions, leprosy reversal reactions, erythem
  • Compounds and methods of the invention can additionally be used to boost the immune system, whether or not the patient being treated has an immunocompromising condition.
  • the compounds described herein can be used in a method to strengthen the immune system during immunisation, e.g., by functioning as an adjuvant, or by being combined with an adjuvant.
  • IRI Ischemia-reperfusion injury
  • Ischemia-reperfusion injury remains a primary complication of transplant surgery, accounting for the majority of kidney transplant failures, acute kidney tubular necrosis and delayed graft function.
  • Compounds of the invention that reduce IRI damage in the kidney can be proposed as drug-candidates and have utility as medicines for limiting organ trauma upon transplantation and other diseases or conditions caused by ischemia-reperfusion, and such utility can be tested in an in vivo model, for example, as described by Wu et al. (J. Clin. Invest. 117:2847-59 (2007)) and Linkermann et al. (Kidney Int. 81: 751-761 (2012)).
  • N-acetylcysteine NAC is the antidote of choice for acetaminophen overdoses, although it is only protective for the injured liver when administered shortly after intoxication of an APAP overdose.
  • Cisplatin is a widely used and potent chemotherapeutic agent to treat a wide spectrum of mainly solid malignancies. Upon entering cells, the chloride atoms in cisplatin are replaced by H 2 O. The hydrolysis product is a reactive molecule that reacts with DNA, but also with GSH. These cisplatin-DNA intra-strand crosslinks result in cytotoxicity towards tumour cells, however, side-reactions with GSH mediate toxic effects such as nephrotoxicity, which in fact is the dose-limiting side effect, GSH depletion and concomitant cell death injury primarily the S3 segment of the proximal tubule in kidney and lead to renal failure (renal tubular dysfunction).
  • Non-apoptotic regulated cell death plays a major role in the pathogenesis of traumatic brain injury (TBI), and the utility of compounds of the invention as a medicine for such condition/disorder/disease can be investigated using an in-vivo murine model for example as described by You et al. (J. Cereb. Blood Flow Metab. 28:1564-73 (2008)), or Rauen et al (J. Neurotrauma 30:1442-8 (2013)).
  • CIA collagen-induced arthritis
  • Reactive oxygen species (ROS) have been implicated as mediators of demyelination and axonal damage in both MS and its animal model, experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis (EAE).
  • Experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis (EAE) is the most commonly used experimental model for the human inflammatory demyelinating disease, multiple sclerosis (MS), for example as described by Racke (Curr. Protoc. Neurosci. 9:unit 9.7 (2001)), and can be used to study the utility of compounds of the invention to treat MS.
  • Septic shock is linked to GSH depletion and multi-organ failure. Children, immune-compromised individuals and elderly people are most affected. Septic shock patients are cared for in intensive care units and the mortality rate is a shocking 25-50%.
  • the disease is caused by gram-negative bacteria that produce endotoxins, also known as bacterial wall lipopolysaccharides.
  • LPS is well known for its ability to trigger oxidative stress and activate the innate immune response by inducing the CD14/TLR4/MD2 receptor complex. This in turn leads to the secretion of pro-inflammatory cytokines in many cell types, particularly in B cells and macrophages.
  • the compounds of the invention may be used for treatment alone or in conjunction with one or more other therapeutically active agents, for example in combination with apoptosis inhibitors.
  • Treatment including the compounds of the invention may be provided at home, the doctor's office, a clinic, a hospital's outpatient department, or a hospital. Treatment generally begins under medical supervision so that medical personnel can observe the treatment's effects closely and make any adjustments that are needed. The duration of the treatment depends on the age and condition of the patient, as well as how the patient responds to the treatment.
  • a person having a greater risk of developing a condition, disorder or disease may receive prophylactic treatment to inhibit or delay symptoms of the condition, disorder or disease.
  • treatment is known to the person of ordinary skill, and includes the application or administration of an agent (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition containing said agent) or procedure to a patient or application or administration of an agent (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition containing said agent) or procedure to a cell, cell culture, cell line, sample, tissue or organ isolated from a patient, who has a condition, disorder or disease, a symptom of the condition, disorder or disease or a predisposition toward a condition, disorder or disease, with the purpose to cure, heal, alleviate, relieve, alter, remedy, ameliorate, improve, affect or prevent the condition, disorder or disease, the symptoms of the condition, disorder or disease or the predisposition toward the condition, disorder or disease.
  • treatment can include prophylactic treatment of a condition, disorder or disease, or the symptom of a condition, disorder or disease.
  • An agent when used in treatment, includes the compounds described herein and includes, but is not limited to, other therapeutically active agents that may be small molecules, peptides, peptidomimetics, polypeptides/proteins, antibodies, nucleotides such as DNA or RNA, cells, viruses, ribozymes, siRNA, and antisense oligonucleotides
  • the compounds of the present invention may be evaluated for their pharmacological properties in animal models of disease.
  • the compounds identified to decrease non-apoptotic regulated cell-death may be structurally modified and subsequently used to decrease non-apoptotic regulated cell-death, or in treatment (including prophylactic treatment) of a condition, disorder or disease as described herein.
  • the methods used to generate structural derivatives of the small molecules that decrease non-apoptotic regulated cell-death are readily known to those skilled in the fields of organic and medicinal chemistry.
  • the compounds of the invention may be used in the cosmetic treatment (including prophylactic and cosmetic treatment) of an aesthetic feature associated with UV-damage in skin, ageing in skin, and/or hair loss.
  • the invention relates to a storage solution for organ transport and/or transplant comprising a compound of the invention.
  • the inventors have identified the compounds of the present invention as a class of small molecules that effectively and selectively inhibit non-apoptotic regulated cell death and/or reduce oxidative stress but do not inhibit apoptotic cell death.
  • the present invention provides (i) a compound of the invention (or a pharmaceutical composition comprising such compound optionally together with a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient) for use in a method of treating (a) a condition, disorder or disease that is characterised by non-apoptotic regulated cell-death or where non-apoptotic regulated cell-death is likely to play or plays a substantial role; (b) a condition, disorder or disease that is characterised by oxidative stress or where oxidative stress is likely to play or plays a substantial role; and/or (c) a condition, disorder or disease that is characterised by activation of (1) one or more components of the necrosome; (2) death domain receptors; and/or (3) Toll-like receptors; and/or (4) players in ferroptotic/ferroptosis signalling, or where activation of any one of (1) to (3) and/or (4) is likely to play or plays a substantial role; and (ii) a method of treating an individual with a need thereof, comprising administering a
  • the individual is suffering from, or is susceptible to or at risk of, one or more of the conditions, disorders or diseases disclosed herein.
  • the condition, disorder or disease may be selected from the group consisting of a neurodegenerative disease of the central or peripheral nervous system, muscle wasting, muscular dystrophy, ischemia, compartment syndrome, gangrene, pressure sores, sepsis, degenerative arthritis, retinal necrosis, heart disease, liver, gastrointestinal or pancreatic disease, avascular necrosis, diabetes, sickle cell disease, alteration of blood vessels, cancer-chemo/radiation therapy-induced cell-death, intoxication, or is the result of, arises from or is associated with any of the foregoing.
  • condition, disorder or disease is the result of, arises from or is associated with a circumstance selected from the group consisting of forms of infection of viruses, bacteria, fungi, or other microorganisms; a reduction in cell-proliferation, an alteration in cell-differentiation or intracellular signalling; an undesirable inflammation; cell death of retinal neuronal cells, cardiac muscle cells, or cells of the immune system, cell death associated with renal failure; neonatal respiratory distress, asphyxia, incarcerated hernia, placental infarct, iron-load complications, endometriosis, congenital disease; head trauma/traumatic brain injury, liver injury; injuries from environmental radiation; burns; cold injuries; mechanical injuries, and decompression sickness.
  • the individual is preferably a mammal and more preferably a human.
  • the compounds of the invention may be administered to the individual by any route, preferably by any route described above in section “Pharmaceutical compositions” for the administration of the pharmaceutical composition of the invention.
  • the compounds of the present invention can be prepared as described below or prepared by methods analogous thereto, which are readily known and available to one of ordinary skill in the art of organic synthesis.
  • compounds 4 may be synthesized in a one-step reaction from applicable derivatives of diamine 1, ketone 2 and isocyanide 3.
  • the synthesis can be conducted as follows. A mixture of 0.5 mmol of diamine 1 and 0.5 mmol of ketone 2 in 0.5 mL methanol is stirred under nitrogen atmosphere at 40-45° C. for 3 h. To this mixture, solutions of 0.5 mmol TMSCl in 0.5 mL acetonitrile and 0.5 mmol of isocyanide 3 in 0.5 mL methanol are added and the resulting mixture stirred at 50-60° C.
  • compounds 4 which are unsubstituted on a ring nitrogen atom of ring A can be prepared according to Scheme 1, generally in accordance with the method described above using a ketone 2 which is suitably protected at the ring nitrogen atom(s) of ring A, followed by a subsequent deprotection step of the protected precursor version of 4.
  • suitable protecting groups for example, N-protecting groups, such as the BOC protecting group
  • reagents and reaction conditions in order to covert a “free” functional group (e.g., an amino group having at least one hydrogen bound to the nitrogen atom, such as —NH—) into a corresponding protected functional group (such as —N(PG)-, wherein PG is a protecting group)
  • a “free” functional group e.g., an amino group having at least one hydrogen bound to the nitrogen atom, such as —NH—
  • PG a protected functional group
  • reagents and reaction conditions in order to remove the protecting group
  • the deprotection step may be performed as follows.
  • deprotected compound 4 typically in pure forms and in yields of 85-90%.
  • a starting material e.g., a specific diamine 1, ketone 2 and/or isocyanide 3
  • a suitable synthon of the specific diamine 1, ketone 2 and/or isocyanide 3 may be used instead.
  • a synthon of a cyclic keton is its corresponding hemiacetal; for example, a synthon of cyclopropanone is cyclopropanone ethyl hemiacetal (such as 1-ethoxy-1-(trimethylsilyloxy) cyclopropane) which is much easier and safer to handle than cyclopropanone and which easily reacts with amines (cf., e.g., Organic Syntheses, Coll. Vol. 7, p. 131 (1990); Vol. 63, p. 147 (1985)).
  • Precursors 1, 2 and 3 are obtained from commercial sources, or are synthesised by standard procedures.
  • derivatives of isocyanide 3 may be obtained using the procedures described by Hoefle and Lange (Organic Syntheses (1983) 61:14).
  • the present invention relates to intermediates 1, 2, and/or 3 which are useful in the preparation of a compound of the present invention as well as to a method of preparing a compound of the present invention comprising the step of reacting a diamine of formula 1, a ketone of formula 2 and an isocyanide of formula 3.
  • a method of preparing a compound of the present invention comprising the step of reacting a diamine of formula 1, a ketone of formula 2 and an isocyanide of formula 3.
  • such preparation or method is represented by scheme 1.
  • Regioisomers of compounds 4 may be isolated by chromatography separation, for example HPLC separation, as will be recognised and practicable by the person of ordinary skill.
  • Enantiomers of racemic mixtures of compounds 4 may be isolated by separation using commercial services and/or products, e.g., those from Chiral Technologies Europe SAS (www.chiral.fr).
  • Tables 1-N, 1-O/S, and 1-C A selection of compounds within the scope of, or for use within the methods of, the present invention is listed in Tables 1-N, 1-O/S, and 1-C.
  • the compounds in Tables 1-N, 1-O/S, and 1-C are synthesised according to Example A, and the surprising cell-death inhibitory activities in cellular assays of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death of such compounds are shown in Table 2, Table 3 and FIGS. 1(a) , (b), and (c), FIG. 2(a) , (b), and (C), and FIGS. 3 and 4 , respectively, as determined according to Examples B.1 to B.3, B.4, and B.5.
  • the use of such compounds in animal models of certain medical conditions, disorders and diseases is described in Examples C.1 to C.8, and procedures to further select and/or develop one or more of such compounds as drugs are described in Example D.
  • Analytical LC/ESI-MS Waters 2700 Autosampler. Waters 1525 Multisolvent Delivery System. 5 ⁇ L sample loop. Column, Phenomenex Onyx Monolythic C18 50 ⁇ 2 mm, with stainless steel 2 ⁇ m prefilter. Eluent A, H 2 O+0.1% HCOOH; eluent B, acetonitrile. Gradient, 5% B to 100% B within 3.80 min, then isocratic for 0.20 min, then back to 5% B within 0.07 min, then isocratic for 0.23 min; flow, 0.6 ml/min and 1.2 ml/min.
  • MS method MS4_15 minPM-80-800-35V; positive/negative ion mode scanning, m/z 80-800 in 1 s; capillary voltage, 4.0 kV; cone voltage, 30 V; multiplier voltage, 900 V; source block and desolvation gas temperature, 120° C. and 300° C., respectively.
  • Waters 996 Photodiode Array Detector set 200 to 400 nm.
  • Software Waters Masslynx V4.0.
  • Preparative thinlayer chromatography Merck PLC plates, silica gel 60 F 254 , 0.5 mm, 1.0 mm or 2.0 mm.
  • Eluents for preparative TLC or column chromatography (CC) on silica gel were: (1) EluentN1: CH 2 Cl 2 /methanol; EluentN2: CH 2 Cl 2 /methanol/NEt 3 for spiroquinoxaline derivatives having an N-heterocycloalkylene as ring A; (2) EluentO1: CH 2 Cl 2 /ethyl acetate/methanol; EluentO2: CH 2 Cl 2 /methanol; EluentO3: petroleum ether/ethyl acetate for spiroquinoxaline derivatives having an O/S-heterocycloalkylene as ring A; or (3) EluentC1: CH 2 C 2 /ethyl acetate/methanol; EluentC2: CH 2 Cl 2 /
  • Preparative HPLC-MS Waters 2767 Autosampler, Waters 600 Multisolvent Delivery System with analytical pump heads (100 ⁇ L); Waters 600 Controller; Waters 2525 Binary Gradient Modul with preparative pump heads (500 ⁇ L). At-Column-Dilution: solvent1, acetonitrile:H 2 O 70:30 (v/v), solvent2, acetonitrile:methanol:dimethylformamide 80:15:5 (v/v/v); flow rate, 5 mL/min Autosampler 2767 with 10 mL syringe and 10 mL Sample loop.
  • Injection volume 9 mL, depending on sample.
  • Make-up solvent methanol-acetonitrile-H 2 O—HCO 2 H 80:15:4.95:0.05 (v/v/v/v).
  • Make-up pump Waters Reagent Manager, flow rate 0.5 mL/min.
  • Waters ZQ single quadrupole mass spectrometer with electrospray source Positive or negative ion mode scanning m/z 105-950 in 1 s; capillary, 3.6 kV; cone voltage, 45 V; multiplier voltage, 700 V; probe and desolvation gas temperature, 120° C. and 250° C., respectively Waters Fraction Collector 2767 with mass or UV-triggered fraction collection. Waters 2487 Dual ⁇ Absorbance Detector, set to 254 m/z. Software, Waters Masslynx V 4.0 SP4.
  • compounds 4 may be formed in a one-step reaction from applicable derivatives of diamine 1, ketone 2 and isocyanide 3 as follows.
  • a mixture of 0.5 mmol of diamine 1 and 0.5 mmol of ketone 2 in 0.5 mL methanol is stirred under nitrogen atmosphere at 40-45° C. for 3 h.
  • solutions of 0.5 mmol TMSCl in 0.5 mL acetonitrile and 0.5 mol of isocyanide 3 in 0.5 mL methanol are added and the resulting mixture stirred at 50-60° C. for 4 h and then for 1 day at 40-50° C., resulting in full conversion of starting materials (monitoring can be done by using LC-MS).
  • reaction mixture is evaporated under reduced pressure, treated with dry ethylacetate and kept in an ultrasonic bath until completion of precipitate formation.
  • the reaction mixture is then centrifuged and the precipitate washed twice with ethylacetate, acetonitrile and ether with centrifugation each time and finally dried under reduced pressure.
  • Compounds 4 are obtained as monohydrochloride salts, typically in pure form, and at yields of 50-90%.
  • Procedure PN1a The reaction mixture was diluted with 1N HCl and water and then extracted twice with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers (F1) contained no or only minor product (LC-MS) and were thus discarded. The aqueous layer was then basified with 1N NaOH and extracted several times with CH 2 Cl 2 . The combined organic layers (F2) were dried over Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by preparative HPLC and/or preparative TLC.
  • Procedure PN1b The reaction mixture was diluted with water, neutralized with saturated aqueous NaHCO 3 and then extracted several times with CH 2 Cl 2 . The combined organic layers were dried over Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by preparative HPLC and/or preparative TLC and/or was transferred into to the corresponding HCl salt by dissolving in diethyl ether and/or CH 2 Cl 2 , adding 4N HCl in dioxane and filtering off the resulting precipitate.
  • Procedure PN2a The reaction mixture was diluted with 2.0 mL ethyl acetate and/or 2.0 mL CH 2 Cl 2 , then 1.0 mL HCl 4M in dioxane was added and the mixture was stirred at r.t. for 1-3 days.
  • Procedure PN2b The reaction mixture was diluted with water, neutralized with saturated aqueous NaHCO 3 and extracted several times with CH 2 Cl 2 . The combined organic layers were dried over Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by preparative TLC and then dissolved in 2.0 mL ethyl acetate.
  • Procedure POa The reaction mixture was diluted with 1N HCl and water. The resulting precipitate was filtered off and washed with water. The filtrate contained no product (LC-MS) and was thus discarded. The crude product was taken up in CH 2 Cl 2 , dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by preparative TLC.
  • Procedure POb The reaction mixture was diluted with 1N HCl and water and then extracted twice with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers (F1) contained no or only minor product (LC-MS) and were thus discarded. The aqueous layer was then basified with 1N NaOH and extracted several times with CH 2 Cl 2 .
  • the residue was purified by preparative HPLC and/or preparative TLC and/or recrystallization from ethanol and/or was transferred into to the corresponding HCl salt by dissolving in diethyl ether and/or CH 2 Cl 2 , adding 4N HCl in dioxane and filtering off the resulting precipitate.
  • Procedure PCa The reaction mixture was evaporated. The residue was treated with ethyl acetate under sonication, the formed precipitate was filtered off. The solid was washed with acetone and then partitioned between saturated, aqueous NaHCO 3 and CH 2 Cl 2 , the organic phase was washed several times with water and the combined aqueous phases were extracted several times with CH 2 Cl 2 . The combined organic phases were dried over Na 2 SO 4 and evaporated. The residue was purified by preparative TLC and/or recrystallization from ethanol. Procedure PCb: The reaction mixture was diluted with 1N HCl and water and then extracted twice with ethyl acetate.
  • the combined organic layers (F1) contained no or only minor product (LC-MS) and were thus discarded.
  • the aqueous layer was then basified with 1N NaOH and extracted several times with CH 2 Cl 2 .
  • the combined organic layers (F2) were dried over Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated in vacuo.
  • the residue was purified by preparative HPLC and/or preparative TLC and/or recrystallization from ethanol and/or was transferred into to the corresponding HCl salt by dissolving in diethyl ether and/or CH 2 Cl 2 , adding 4N HCl in dioxane and filtering off the resulting precipitate.
  • Procedure PCc The reaction mixture was diluted with water (40 mL) and extracted several times with CH 2 Cl 2 .
  • a general method for the synthesis of compound 4 with a free NH 2 -group by deprotection of a BOC-protected compound 4 is as follows. A mixture of 0.46 mmol of diamine 1 and 0.46 mmol of Boc-protected ketone 2 in 2.0 mL methanol was stirred at 50° C. for 4 hours. To this mixture, solutions of 0.46 mmol TMSCl in 0.50 mL acetonitrile and 0.46 mmol of isocyanide 3 in 0.50 mL methanol were added and the resulting mixture was stirred at 50-60° C. for 4 hours and then at r.t. overnight which resulted in full consumption of starting materials (LC-MS).
  • the reaction mixture was diluted with 1N HCl (5.0 mL) and water and extracted several times with CH 2 Cl 2 .
  • the combined organic layers were dried over Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated in vacuo.
  • the residue was purified by preparative TLC and dissolved in 2.0 mL ethyl acetate. 1.0 mL HCl 4.0 M in dioxane was added and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 day.
  • the reaction mixture was diluted with water and extracted twice with ethyl acetate.
  • the combined organic layers (F1) contained no product and were thus discarded.
  • the aqueous layer was basified with 1N NaOH and extracted several times with CH 2 Cl 2 .
  • the combined organic layers (F2) were dried over Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated in vacuo.
  • the residue was purified by preparative TLC.
  • the present inventors observed the surprising finding that compounds disclosed herein are (presumed) able to penetrate cell membranes and showed activity as inhibitors of non-apoptotic cell death induced in cells of the human neuroblastoma cell line SH-SY5Y grown in-vitro.
  • L-Buthionine sulfoximine is a well-known glutathione (GSH) depletory, which inhibits gamma-glutamyl-cysteine-synthetase, the enzyme catalyzing the rate-limiting step in GSH biosynthesis.
  • GSH glutathione
  • the human neuroblastoma cell line SH-SY5Y is sensitive to BSO-induced intracellular glutathione depletion, which causes high levels of reactive oxygen species (ROS) and cellular stress mimicking cellular conditions following ischemia (cf, e.g., Yamada et al., Neurochem. Int. 59:1003-9 (2011)).
  • ROS reactive oxygen species
  • SH-SY5Y cells (ATCC® CRL-2266TM) were propagated in DMEM supplemented with 10% FBS/1% Penicillin-Streptomycin, and then seeded onto 96-well plates at a concentration of 750 cells/well in 100 ⁇ L of media, to which BSO (Sigma Aldrich) was added (to a final concentration of 50 ⁇ M) together with increasing concentrations of the compound to be tested, and the plates incubated at 37° C./5% CO 2 for 72 hours.
  • BSO Sigma Aldrich
  • the present inventors observed the surprising finding that compounds disclosed herein showed activity as inhibitors of another model of non-apoptotic cell death induced in cells of the mouse hippocampal cell line (Ht22) grown in-vitro.
  • Glutamate toxicity is conferred on cells from the mouse hippocampal cell line (Ht22) by inhibition of the cysteine/glutamate antiporter, System xc-, leading to impaired cysteine uptake and subsequent GSH depletion.
  • This model is frequently used for mimicking glutathione depletion following oxidative stress in stroke, brain trauma and other neurodegenerative diseases and cellular conditions following ischemia (for example: van Leyen et al, J. Neurochem. 92:824-30 (2005)).
  • GLU glutamate
  • Ht22 cells were propagated DMEM supplemented with 10% FBS/1% Penicillin-Streptomycin, and then seeded onto 96-well plates at a concentration of 2,000 cells/well in 100 ⁇ L of MEDIA, simultaneously with glutamate (Sigma Aldrich) to a final concentration of 5 mM, together with increasing concentrations of the compound to be tested (0.5 pM to 100 ⁇ M), and the plates incubated at 37° C./5% CO 2 for 72 hours. Compound dilutions were prepared from 10 mM stocks dissolved in DMSO and diluted in media. Cells treated with glutamate alone were used as negative control and alpha-tocopherol (Sigma Aldrich) was used as positive control. Compound concentrations were tested in triplicate. After incubation, cell survival was detected and quantified as described in Example B.1. IC 50 values in such assay obtained for certain compounds disclosed herein are shown in Table 2 and Table 3.
  • the present inventors observed the surprising finding that compounds disclosed herein that showed activity as inhibitors of non-apoptotic cell death (as described above), did not appear to inhibit cell-death in an assays for classical apoptosis (for example: Alikhani et al., J. Cell Physiol. 201:341-8 (2004)).
  • apoptosis (e.g., as assays in Example B.3) is believed to occur under or as a result of normal physiological conditions or events in a highly programmed manner as part of normal tissue homeostasis and cell turnover; while, conversely, non-apoptotic regulated cell death is thought to be triggered by abnormal physiological conditions or events such as external damaging stimuli and/or oxidative stress.
  • Compounds that inhibit non-apoptotic regulated cell-death but do not appear to inhibit apoptotic cell-death may have preferred utility in the methods and applications of the present invention, as they may not interfere with the individual's innate cell-death mechanism and regulation, but preferentially only that caused by abnormal physiological conditions or events such as external damaging stimuli and/or oxidative stress.
  • SH-SY5Y cells were propagated and seeded in 96-well plates, together with the compound to be tested (1 ⁇ M), generally as described in Example B.1, except they were seeded at 1,000 cell/well and instead of BSO, TNF-alpha (hivitrogen) was added to a final concentration of 10 mg/mL to induce apoptosis.
  • TNF-alpha hivitrogen
  • Z-VAD-fmk Enzo Life Science; final concentration 501 ⁇ M
  • necroptosis inhibitor Necrostatin-1 Necrostatin-1
  • Control wells were established with vehicle only (DMSO), with and without treatment with TNF-alpha to induce apoptosis. Cells were incubated, and cell survival was detected and quantified as described in Example B.1. Percentage cell survival after TNF-alpha-induced apoptosis for certain compounds disclosed herein are shown in FIG. 1 . Surprisingly, those compounds tested appear to show more specificity than Nec-1 at known active concentrations.
  • GSH glutathione peroxidase 4
  • GPx4 glutathione peroxidase 4
  • a conditional GPx4 knockout mouse model which allows experimental manipulation of endogenous ROS levels to mimic degenerative diseases (Seiler, A., et al, 2008; Cell Metab 8:237) was used to show that oxidative stress causes cell death by a specific signaling pathway entailing lipid peroxide generation and apoptosis-inducing-factor mediated cell death (Mannes et al, 2011; FASEB doi: 10.1096/0.10-177147).
  • Knockout of GPx4 in neurons causes massive neurodegeneration in cortical, cerebellar and hippocampal neurons underscoring the high relevance of ROS-induced cell death signaling in the brain.
  • IRI ischemia-reperfusion injury
  • ischemia is induced in the liver of 6-8 week old C57BL/6 mice (Charles River) by midline laparotomy whereby the blood supply to the left and median lobes of the liver is interrupted via atraumatic clipping for 90 rain, followed by reperfusion for a period of 24h. After reperfusion, but prior to final abdominal closure, animals are treated with a single i.p. dose of the compound to be tested (10 mg/Kg), or with vehicle (DMSO) as negative control.
  • DMSO vehicle
  • FIGS. 2(a) and (b) show a significant reduction of the serum markers for liver cell damage, OPT and GOT, respectively (compared to vehicle control), upon treatment with a compound of the invention (N-2) of mice following IRI liver damage.
  • the “Sham” bar represents the data from control animals that were treated to the same protocol but without atraumatic clipping.
  • FIG. 2(c) shows a photograph representing a visual comparison between vehicle and compound-treated livers of mice from this study.
  • ischemia is induced in the kidney of 6-8 week old C57BL/6 mice by interruption of the blood supply to the kidney via reversible clipping of the Arteria renalis for 30 min, followed by reperfusion for a period of 24 h.
  • Mice are treated with compound (or vehicle control) generally as described in Example C.1 at 1 hour prior to and four hours after abdomal closure and once daily over a period of 14 days.
  • Markers to be investigated for IRI of kidney include reduction of creatnine levels in the serum along with histopathological analysis.
  • FIG. 3 shows an improvement of survival of mice suffering kidney-ischemic reperfision injury (compared to vehicle control) after treatment with a compound of the invention (N-2) at a dose of both 1 and 10 mg/kg.
  • mice groups of 6-8 week-old male C57BL/6 mice are given an i.p. injection of APAP (400 mg/kg) in saline, and at the same time or at a given time thereafter, compounds to be tested are administered (1 mg/Kg or 10 mg/Kg) by i.p. injection, or vehicle (DMSO) as control.
  • APAP 400 mg/kg
  • DMSO vehicle
  • Mice are sacrificed by CO 2 asphyxiation 6 h after the APAP dose, and to assess liver damage, livers are removed and washed in phosphate buffered saline, and portions of liver tissue are fixed in 10% buffered formalin or flash frozen at ⁇ 80° C.
  • the extent of non-apoptotic cell death is scored by haematoxylin and eosin staining.
  • the extent of APAP-induced liver injury is determined by measuring aspartate aminotransferase (AST) and alanine aminotransferase (ALT) catalytic activities in serum.
  • AST aspartate aminotransferase
  • ALT alanine aminotransferase
  • Reduced GSH levels in liver and liver mitochondria extracts are measured using a glutathione assay kit.
  • Non-apoptotic regulated cell death plays a major role in the pathogenesis of traumatic brain injury (TBI), and the utility of compounds of the invention as a medicine for such condition/disorder/disease can be investigated using an in-vivo murine model for example as described by You et al. (J. Cereb. Blood Flow Metab. 28:1564-73 (2008)), or Rauen et al. (J. Neurotrauma 30:1442-8 (2013)).
  • mice Male C57BL/6 mice are anesthetised prior to the induction of trauma. Core body temperature is maintained at 37° C. using a feedback-controlled heating pad connected to a rectal probe. To induce trauma, a craniotorny is prepared over the right parietal cortex. Controlled cortical impact (CCI) is delivered perpendicular to the surface of the brain with a custom-made CCI applicator for mice using the following parameters: 8 m/s velocity, 3 mm diameter, 1 mm brain displacement and 150 ms duration. Following CCI, the skull is closed by affixing the removed bone flap using veterinary-grade tissue glue (Vetbond, 3M, St. Paul, Minn.).
  • CCI veterinary-grade tissue glue
  • FIG. 4 shows a trend of a (non-significant) positive effect of treatment with a compound of the invention (N-2), reducing the contusion volume in the brains of mice following TBI.
  • the collagen-induced arthritis (CIA) mouse model is the most commonly studied autoimmune model of rheumatoid arthritis, for example as described by Brand et al. (Nat. Protoc. 2:1269-75 (2007)), and can be used to study the utility of compounds of the invention to treat RA.
  • RA is induced in this model by immunization with an emulsion of complete Freund's adjuvant and type II collagen as described in Brand et al. (2007).
  • Compounds are administered daily by i.p. injections starting at day one. 40% PEG is used as vehicle control. Mice are monitored daily and disease progression is assessed using a scoring system.
  • Compounds disclosed herein are investigated for their utility in the treatment of MS, using an in-vivo murine model of such condition/disorder/disease.
  • EAE Experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis
  • MS multiple sclerosis
  • EAE is induced as described in Racke (2001).
  • Compounds are administered daily by i.p. injections starting at day one.
  • 40% PEG is used as vehicle control.
  • Mice are monitored daily and disease progression is assessed using a scoring system.
  • Compounds disclosed herein are investigated for their utility in the treatment of LPS-induced endotoxic shock, using an in-vivo murine model of such condition/disorder/disease.
  • endotoxic shock is induced by i.p. injection of LPS at a dose of 20 mg/kg of body weight in 6-8 week-old male C57BL/6 mice.
  • Compounds to be tested are administered daily (1 mg/Kg or 10 mg/Kg) by i.p. injection, or vehicle (DMSO) as control, for a subsequent observation period of 4 days. Survival of mice is monitored by inspection twice daily for 5 days.
  • Such data can include the in vitro inhibition of non-apoptotic cell-death, in particular inhibition of necroptosis or ferroptosis, as measured by IC 50 , or from applicable in-vivo animal models of conditions, disorders and/or diseases.
  • experiments may also include the elucidation and/or determination of the target or mechanism of action of the subject compound or the target profile of the subject compound, and other characteristics of the subject compound, such as the binding affinity of the compound to the target(s) or the binding site of the compound on the target(s) and pharmacokinetic properties.
  • Such experiments may also include molecular modelling of the drug-target interaction and the identification of metabolites formed after administration.
  • the compound that shows the most appropriate results for IC 50 for inhibition of non-apoptotic cell-death inhibition and/or in-vivo animal-model data, and/or other features, including absorption, distribution, metabolism, and excretion (ADME), pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic properties, may be chosen to enter further experiments. Such experiments may include, for example, therapeutic profiling and toxicology in animals, phase I clinical trials in humans and other clinical trails.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Endocrinology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Emergency Medicine (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Obesity (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Dermatology (AREA)
US16/670,784 2013-07-15 2014-07-15 Spiroquinoxaline derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death Active USRE48992E1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US16/670,784 USRE48992E1 (en) 2013-07-15 2014-07-15 Spiroquinoxaline derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death

Applications Claiming Priority (9)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP13176581 2013-07-15
EP13176582 2013-07-15
EP13176582 2013-07-15
EP13176580 2013-07-15
EP13176580 2013-07-15
EP13176581 2013-07-15
US16/670,784 USRE48992E1 (en) 2013-07-15 2014-07-15 Spiroquinoxaline derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death
PCT/EP2014/065145 WO2015007730A1 (fr) 2013-07-15 2014-07-15 Dérivés de spiroquinoxaline en tant qu'inhibiteurs de la mort cellulaire régulée non apoptotique
US14/904,377 US9802956B2 (en) 2013-07-15 2014-07-15 Spiroquinoxaline derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
USRE48992E1 true USRE48992E1 (en) 2022-03-29

Family

ID=51210476

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/670,784 Active USRE48992E1 (en) 2013-07-15 2014-07-15 Spiroquinoxaline derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death
US14/904,377 Ceased US9802956B2 (en) 2013-07-15 2014-07-15 Spiroquinoxaline derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death
US15/707,729 Active US10280179B2 (en) 2013-07-15 2017-09-18 Spiroquinoxaline derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death

Family Applications After (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/904,377 Ceased US9802956B2 (en) 2013-07-15 2014-07-15 Spiroquinoxaline derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death
US15/707,729 Active US10280179B2 (en) 2013-07-15 2017-09-18 Spiroquinoxaline derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death

Country Status (9)

Country Link
US (3) USRE48992E1 (fr)
EP (1) EP3021847B1 (fr)
JP (3) JP6851825B2 (fr)
CN (1) CN105611930B (fr)
AU (1) AU2014292132B2 (fr)
CA (1) CA2955059A1 (fr)
ES (1) ES2955206T3 (fr)
IL (1) IL243610B (fr)
WO (1) WO2015007730A1 (fr)

Families Citing this family (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
AU2014292132B2 (en) 2013-07-15 2018-11-08 Marcus Conrad Spiroquinoxaline derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death
WO2016075137A1 (fr) * 2014-11-10 2016-05-19 Helmholtz Zentrum München - Deutsches Forschungszentrum für Gesundheit und Umwelt (GmbH) Dérivés de spiropyrazine en tant qu'inhibiteurs de la mort cellulaire régulée non apoptotique
MX2019003368A (es) 2016-09-23 2019-09-16 Purdue Research Foundation Agentes anticancerigenos y preparacion de los mismos.
GB201800994D0 (en) * 2018-01-22 2018-03-07 Ucl Business Plc Combination therapeutics
AU2019258078B2 (en) * 2018-04-27 2023-12-21 Chengdu Henghao Investment Co. Limited 10H-phenothiazine ferroptosis inhibitor and preparation method therefor and application thereof
CN111575362B (zh) * 2020-04-20 2021-10-29 中国医学科学院北京协和医院 一种预测系统性红斑狼疮疾病活动度的药物
JPWO2022075444A1 (fr) 2020-10-09 2022-04-14
US11541116B1 (en) 2022-01-07 2023-01-03 Kojin Therapeutics, Inc. Methods and compositions for inducing ferroptosis in vivo

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5043270A (en) 1989-03-31 1991-08-27 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Intronic overexpression vectors
EP0509398A1 (fr) 1991-04-15 1992-10-21 Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft Quinoxalines, procédé pour leur préparation et leur utilisation
CA2137605A1 (fr) 1993-12-09 1995-06-10 Christoph Meichsner Preparation d'une combinaison renfermant une quinoxaline et un nucleoside
US6369057B1 (en) 1991-04-15 2002-04-09 Aventis Pharma Deutschland Gmbh Quinoxalines, processes for their preparation and their use
WO2007117180A1 (fr) 2006-04-12 2007-10-18 'chemical Diversity Research Institute' Ltd. Bibliothèques combinatoire et focalisée d'azahétérocycles, composition pharmaceutique et procédés de leur fabrication
KR20120105714A (ko) 2011-03-16 2012-09-26 영남대학교 산학협력단 단일?반응용기 3?성분 축합반응을 이용하는 ３，４?디하이드로퀴녹살린?２?아민 유도체의 친환경적 제조방법
WO2015007730A1 (fr) 2013-07-15 2015-01-22 Helmholtz Zentrum München - Deutsches Forschungszentrum für Gesundheit und Umwelt (GmbH) Dérivés de spiroquinoxaline en tant qu'inhibiteurs de la mort cellulaire régulée non apoptotique
US10647687B2 (en) * 2014-11-10 2020-05-12 Helmholtz Zentrum München Deutsches Forschungszentrum Für Gesundheit Und Umwelt (Gmbh) Spiropyrazine derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6994981B2 (en) * 2002-02-19 2006-02-07 The Buck Institute Modulators of paraptosis and related methods

Patent Citations (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5043270A (en) 1989-03-31 1991-08-27 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Intronic overexpression vectors
EP0509398A1 (fr) 1991-04-15 1992-10-21 Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft Quinoxalines, procédé pour leur préparation et leur utilisation
US6369057B1 (en) 1991-04-15 2002-04-09 Aventis Pharma Deutschland Gmbh Quinoxalines, processes for their preparation and their use
CA2137605A1 (fr) 1993-12-09 1995-06-10 Christoph Meichsner Preparation d'une combinaison renfermant une quinoxaline et un nucleoside
EP0657166A1 (fr) 1993-12-09 1995-06-14 Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft Composition contenant un quinixaline et un nucléoside
WO2007117180A1 (fr) 2006-04-12 2007-10-18 'chemical Diversity Research Institute' Ltd. Bibliothèques combinatoire et focalisée d'azahétérocycles, composition pharmaceutique et procédés de leur fabrication
KR20120105714A (ko) 2011-03-16 2012-09-26 영남대학교 산학협력단 단일?반응용기 3?성분 축합반응을 이용하는 ３，４?디하이드로퀴녹살린?２?아민 유도체의 친환경적 제조방법
WO2015007730A1 (fr) 2013-07-15 2015-01-22 Helmholtz Zentrum München - Deutsches Forschungszentrum für Gesundheit und Umwelt (GmbH) Dérivés de spiroquinoxaline en tant qu'inhibiteurs de la mort cellulaire régulée non apoptotique
US20160222025A1 (en) 2013-07-15 2016-08-04 Helmholtz Zentrum München Deutsches Forschungszentrum Für Gesundheit Und Umwelt (Gmbh) Spiroquinoxaline derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death
US9802956B2 (en) 2013-07-15 2017-10-31 Helmholtz Zentrum Munchen-Deutsches Forschungszentrum Fur Gesundheit Und Umwelt (Gmbh) Spiroquinoxaline derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death
US10280179B2 (en) 2013-07-15 2019-05-07 Helmholtz Zentrum München Deutsches Forschungzentrum Für Gesundheit Und Umwelt (Gmbh) Spiroquinoxaline derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death
US10647687B2 (en) * 2014-11-10 2020-05-12 Helmholtz Zentrum München Deutsches Forschungszentrum Für Gesundheit Und Umwelt (Gmbh) Spiropyrazine derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death

Non-Patent Citations (55)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
CAS Registry No. 1172351-24-4, Entered STN: Aug. 4, 2009, 1 page.
CAS Registry No. 1172351-24-4, Entered STN: Aug. 4, 2009, 17 pages.
CAS Registry No. 1223830-23-6, Entered STN: May 16, 2010, 18 pages.
CAS Registry No. 1223982-82-8, Entered STN: May 16, 2010, 18 pages.
CAS Registry, No. 950455-12-6, entered STN Oct. 12, 2007, 1 page.
CAS Registry, No. 951542-68-0, entered STN Oct. 26, 2007, 1 page.
Chari, Murugulla Adharvana. "Amberlyst-15: an efficient and reusable catalyst for multi-component synthesis of 3,4-dihydroquinoxalin-2-amine derivatives at room temperature." Tetrahedron Letters (2011); 52.46: 6108-6112.
CHEMICAL ABSTRACTS, Columbus, Ohio, US; XP002715536
CHEMICAL ABSTRACTS, Columbus, Ohio, US; XP002715537
CHEMICAL ABSTRACTS, Columbus, Ohio, US; XP002715538
CHEMICAL ABSTRACTS, Columbus, Ohio, US; XP002715539
CHEMICAL ABSTRACTS, Columbus, Ohio, US; XP002715540
DATABASE REGISTRY [online] CHEMICAL ABSTRACTS SERVICE, COLUMBUS, OHIO, US; XP002715529
Database Registry [Online], Chemical Abstracts Service, Accession No. 1223807-41-7, Entered STN: May 16, 2010, XP-002715540, Abstract, 1 page.
Database Registry [Online], Chemical Abstracts Service, Accession No. 1223830-23-6, Entered STN: May 16, 2010, XP-002715539, Abstract, 1 page.
Database Registry [Online], Chemical Abstracts Service, Accession No. 1223968-05-5, Entered STN: May 16, 2010, XP-002715538, Abstract, 1 page.
Database Registry [Online], Chemical Abstracts Service, Accession No. 1223984-84-6, Entered STN: May 16, 2010, XP-002715537, Abstract, 1 page.
Database Registry [Online], Chemical Abstracts Service, Accession No. 1223999-27-6, Entered STN: May 16, 2010, XP-002715536, Abstract, 1 page.
Database Registry [Online], Chemical Abstracts Service, Accession No. 1224002-65-6, Entered STN: May 16, 2010, XP-002715529, Abstract, 1 page.
Database Registry [Online], Chemical Abstracts Service, Accession No. 123984-84-6, Entered STN: May 16, 2010, XP-002715537, Abstract, 1 page.
Database Registry, 2010, RN 1223807-05-3, RN 1223793-57-4, RN 1223793-34-7, RN 1223791-74-9, RN 1223763-49-2, RN 1223759-24-7, RN 1223759-16-7, RN 1223757-52-5, RN 1223754-87-7, Retrieved from STN international [online]; retrieved on Aug. 28, 2020, 9 pages.
Database Registry, 2010, RN 1223996-31-3, RN 1223982-82-8, RN 1223965-89-6, RN 1170568-72-5, Retrieved from STN international [online]; retrieved on Aug. 28, 2020, 4 pages.
Database Registry, 2010, RN 1224012-75-2, RN 1224008-84-7, RN 1224006-52-3, RN 1224003-66-0, RN 1223997-84-9, RN 1223996-30-2, RN 1223983-88-7, RN 1223968-28-2, RN 1223941-38-5, RN 1223994-91-9, RN 1223979-37-0, RN 1223967-79-0, RN 1223929-00-7, RN 1223993-70-1, RN 1223970-21-5, RN 1223962-89-7, RN 1223919-98-9, RN 1223898-24-5, RN 1223858-14-7, RN 1223824-64-3, RN 1223862-29-0, RN 1223855-82-0, RN 1223822-46-5, RN 1223861-25-3, RN 1223832-77-6, Retrieved from STN international [online]; retrieved on Aug. 28, 2020, 25 pages.
Degterev, Alexei, et al. "Chemical inhibitor of nonapoptotic cell death with therapeutic potential for ischemic brain injury." Nature Chemical Biology (2005); 1.2: 112-119.
Dixon, Scott J., et al. "Ferroptosis: an iron-dependent form of nonapoptotic cell death." Cell (2012); 149.5: 1060-1072.
Feoktistova, Maria, et al. "clAPs block Ripoptosome formation, a RIP1/caspase-8 containing intracellular cell death complex differentially regulated by cFLIP isoforms." Molecular Cell (2011); 43.3: 449-463.
Frankowski, K.J., et al. "Synthesis and receptor profiling of Stemona alkaloid analogues reveal a potent class of sigma ligands." Proc. Natl Acad Sci U S A (2011); 108(17): 6727-6732. doi: 10.1073/pnas.1016558108. Epub Feb. 28, 2011. and Erratum: Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A. (2012);109(38): 15526-15527.
Galluzzi, Lorenzo, and Kroemer, Guido. "Necroptosis: a specialized pathway of programmed necrosis." Cell (2008); 135.7: 1161-1163.
Galluzzi, Lorenzo, et al. "Molecular definitions of cell death subroutines: recommendations of the Nomenclature Committee on Cell Death 2012." Cell Death and Differentiation (2012); 19.1: 107-120.
Hitomi, Junichi, et al. "Identification of a molecular signaling network that regulates a cellular necrotic cell death pathway." Cell (2008); 135.7: 1311-1323.
International Patent Application No. PCT/EP2014/065145, International Preliminary Report on Patentability dated Jan. 19, 2016, 6 pages.
International Patent Application No. PCT/EP2014/065145, Search Report and Written Opinion dated Sep. 11, 2014, 10 pages.
Jaworska, et al., "Review of Methods for Assessing the Applicability Domains of SARS and QSARS." ptcl.chem.o.ac.uk/MSD structure relationship, pp. 1-8 (2004).
Kaiser, William J., et al. "Receptor-interacting protein homotypic interaction motif-dependent control of NF-κB activation via the DNA-dependent activator of IFN regulatory factors." The Journal of Immunology (2008); 181.9: 6427-6434.
Kolla, Srinivasa Rao, and Lee, Yong Rok . "EDTA-catalyzed synthesis of 3, 4-dihydroquinoxalin-2-amine derivatives by a three-component coupling of one-pot condensation reactions in an aqueous medium." Tetrahedron (2010); 66.46: 8938-8944.
Kroemer, G., et al. "Classification of cell death: recommendations of the Nomenclature Committee on Cell Death 2009." Cell Death and Differentiation (2009); 16.1: 3-11.
Kysil, Volodymyr, et al. "General Multicomponent Straegy for the Synthesis of 2-Amino-1, 4-diazaheterocycles: Scope, Limitations, and Utility." European Journal of Organic Chemistry (2010); 2010. 8: 1525-1543.
Kysil, Volodymyr, et al. "General Multicomponent Strategy for the Synthesis of 2-Amino-1, 4-diazaheterocycles: Scope, Limitations, and Utility." European Journal of Organic Chemistry (2010); 2010.8: 1525-1543.
Lin, Michael T., and Beal, M. Flint. "Mitochondrial dysfunction and oxidative stress in neurodegenerative diseases." Nature (2006); 443.7113: 787-795.
Mack, Claudia, et al. "Inhibition of proinflammatory and innate immune signaling pathways by a cytomegalovirus RIP1-interacting protein." Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences (2008); 105.8: 3094-3099.
Micheau, Olivier, and Tschopp, Jürg. "Induction of TNF receptor I-mediated apoptosis via two sequential signaling complexes." Cell (2003); 114.2: 181-190.
RN 1170568-72-5 Registry, Database Registry [Online] Retrieved from STN, Jul. 30, 2009, retrieved on Apr. 4, 2018, 1 page.
RN 1172068-37-9 Registry, Database Registry [Online] Retrieved from STN, Aug. 3, 2009, retrieved on Apr. 4, 2018, 1 page.
RN 1223754-87-7, 1223757-52-5, 1223759-16-7, 1223759-24-7, 1223791-74-9, 1223793-34-7, 1223807-05-3, 1223822-46-5, 1223824-64-3, 1223832-77-6, 1223858-14-7, 1223861-25-3, 1223862-29-0, 1223898-24-5,1223919-98-9, 1223929-00-7, 1223967-79-0, 1223968-28-2, 1223970-21-5, 1223979-37-0, 1223983-88-7, 1223984-84-6, 1223993-70-1, 1223994-91-9, 1223996-30-2, 1223997-84-9, 1224003-66-0, 1224006-52-3, 1224008-84-7, 1224012-75-2 Registry, Database Registry [Online] Retrieved from STN, May 16, 2010, retrieved on Apr. 4, 2018, 7 pages.
RN 1223793-57-4, 1223830-23-6, 1223855-82-0, 1223941-38-5, 1223962-89-7, 1223965-89-6, 1223968-05-5, 1223982-82-8, 1223996-31-3, 1223999-27-6, 1224002-65-6 Registry, Database Registry [Online] Retrieved from STN, May 16, 2010, retrieved on Apr. 4, 2018, 3 pages.
RN 1340672-63-0, 1340673-11-1,1340673-24-6, 1340673-57-5, 1340674-69-2, 1340676-60-9, 1340677-25-9, 1340677-91-9, 1340678-07-0, 1340678-12-7, 1340678-20-7, 1340679-25-5, 1340679-29-9, 1340679-66-4, 1340681-12-0, 1340682-81-6, 1340683-28-4, 1340683-33-1, 1340684-25-4, 1340687-77-5, 1340687-86-6 Registry, Database Registry [Online] Retrieved from STN, Nov. 4, 2011, retrieved on Apr. 4, 2018, 5 pages.
RN 950455-15-9 Registry, Database Registry [Online] Retrieved from STN, Oct. 12, 2007, retrieved on Apr. 4, 2018, 1 page.
RN 951458-44-9 Registry, Database Registry [Online] Retrieved from STN, Oct. 26, 2007, retrieved on Apr. 4, 2018, 1 page.
Sun, Liming, et al. "Mixed lineage kinase domain-like protein mediates necrosis signaling downstream of RIP3 kinase." Cell (2012); 148.1: 213-227.
Tenev, Tencho, et al. "The Ripoptosome, a signaling platform that assembles in response to genotoxic stress and loss of IAPs." Molecular Cell (2011); 43.3: 432-448.
Vandenabeele, Peter, et al. "Molecular mechanisms of necroptosis: an ordered cellular explosion." Nature Reviews Molecular Cell Biology (2010); 11.10: 700-714.
Vandenabeele, Peter, et al. "Molecular mechanisms of necroptosis: an ordered cellular explosion." Nature Reviews of Molecular Cell Biology (2010); 11.10: 700-714.
Vanlangenakker, Nele, et al. "cIAP1 and TAK1 protect cells from TNF-induced necrosis by preventing RIP1/RIP3-dependent reactive oxyben species production." Cell Death & Differentiation (2011); 18.4: 656-665.
Vanlangenakker, Nele, et al. "cIAP1 and TAK1 protect cells from TNF-induced necrosis by preventing RIP1/RIP3-dependent reactive oxygen species production." Cell Death & Differentiation (2011); 18.4: 656-665.
Wang, Zhigao, et al. "The mitochondrial phosphatase PGAM5 functions at the convergence point of multiple necrotic death pathways." Cell (2012); 148.1: 228-243.

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20160222025A1 (en) 2016-08-04
JP6851825B2 (ja) 2021-03-31
CN105611930B (zh) 2021-03-02
JP2019196390A (ja) 2019-11-14
US10280179B2 (en) 2019-05-07
ES2955206T3 (es) 2023-11-29
CA2955059A1 (fr) 2015-01-22
EP3021847B1 (fr) 2023-06-07
JP2016525104A (ja) 2016-08-22
JP2022169796A (ja) 2022-11-09
WO2015007730A1 (fr) 2015-01-22
AU2014292132B2 (en) 2018-11-08
US9802956B2 (en) 2017-10-31
EP3021847A1 (fr) 2016-05-25
US20180065982A1 (en) 2018-03-08
IL243610B (en) 2020-03-31
CN105611930A (zh) 2016-05-25
AU2014292132A1 (en) 2016-03-03
IL243610A0 (en) 2016-02-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10280179B2 (en) Spiroquinoxaline derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death
US10647687B2 (en) Spiropyrazine derivatives as inhibitors of non-apoptotic regulated cell-death
WO2018030463A9 (fr) Dérivé de pyridone polycyclique substitué et composition pharmaceutique contenant un promédicament de celui-ci
US9840504B2 (en) Pyrazolopyridine derivatives and their use in therapy
CN108463222B (zh) 用于治疗疾病的杂环化合物
CA3173843A1 (fr) Inhibiteurs de proteine bcl-2
AU2018200421A1 (en) Naphthyridinedione derivatives
US9908851B2 (en) 2-piperidinyl substituted N,3-dihydroxybutanamides
US20180312525A1 (en) NAMPT Inhibitors for Cancer Therapy
WO1996030350A1 (fr) Derives d'amidine
US20220356168A1 (en) Ire1 small molecule inhibitors
FI57942B (fi) Foerfarande foer framstaellning av nya 2-fenylhydrazinotiazoliner eller -tiaziner foer anvaendning saosom hypnotiska eller narkotiska medel
CN115515682B (zh) 用于治疗神经退行性疾病和线粒体疾病的组合物及其使用方法
US10568852B2 (en) Combination compositions and their use in methods for treating obesity and obesity-related disorders
US8283370B2 (en) Imidazolidinedione derivatives as antimalarial agents, preparation thereof, and methods of use
WO2024044553A1 (fr) Utilisation de (isoindolin-2-yl)(4-hydroxy-3-(isoindoline-2-carbonyl)phényl)méthanones dans le traitement du dysfonctionnement de la protéine 1 associée au récepteur du facteur de nécrose tumorale
WO2019232223A1 (fr) Inhibiteurs sélectifs de hsp90 bêta

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
FEPP Fee payment procedure

Free format text: ENTITY STATUS SET TO UNDISCOUNTED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: BIG.); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: SMALL ENTITY

FEPP Fee payment procedure

Free format text: ENTITY STATUS SET TO SMALL (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: SMAL); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: SMALL ENTITY

AS Assignment

Owner name: HELMHOLTZ ZENTRUM MUENCHEN - DEUTSCHES FORSCHUNGSZENTRUM FUER GESUNDHEIT UND UMWELT (GMBH), GERMANY

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:CONRAD, MARCUS;SCHICK, JOEL;PRONETH, BETTINA;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20160406 TO 20160408;REEL/FRAME:051714/0875